JP7078158B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting winning means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a winning / failing lottery is performed using a variable display means. In order to teach the result of the above, variable display is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-271480

Here, a novel gaming machine is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a novel gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
An entry means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
In a gaming machine provided with a changing means capable of changing a state between an allowable state for allowing entry into the ball entry means and a regulated state for restricting entry into the ball entry means .
A pre-cover provided in the game area so as to cover at least a part of the changing means and the front of the range including the ball entering means so as to be separated from the game board by a distance through which the game ball can pass. Means and
A mode changing means including a light emitting means provided in a region where at least a part of the changing means in a predetermined state which is on the allowable state side of the regulated state can overlap with the front view of the gaming machine is provided.
The first state in which the changing means is in the predetermined state and the light emitting means is in the light emitting state,
A second state in which the changing means is in the regulated state and the light emitting means is turned off,
The changing means has a third state in which the light emitting means is in the regulated state and the light emitting means is in the light emitting state.
A front view of the gaming machine with respect to the light emitting means in the game region, which is the region in which the changing means in the predetermined state exists in the third state and is in the light emitting state. The game ball is configured to be movable in the overlapping area in
In the third state, the light emitting means in the light emitting state comes into contact with the gaming ball moving in the overlapping region in the front view of the gaming machine, and after the contact, the gaming ball is contacted by the pre-covering means. It is characterized by being provided with means for making the area covered in front movable .

According to claim 1, a novel gaming machine can be provided .

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the receive interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for the determination of a decorative pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold icon setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the hold icon pattern storage table. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold icon setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo blade opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo feather effect processing. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative pattern display device (holding display area). In the front view of the start winning unit, (a) shows the state where the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, and (b) shows the state where the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. (A) is a front view of the base plate, and (b) is a rear view of the front decorative portion (cover unit). It is a perspective view which shows the blade member, the pseudo blade member and the like. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the start winning unit. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member and the pseudo blade member in another embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member and the like in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the start winning unit in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the start winning unit of another embodiment, (a) is a front schematic diagram of a blade member and a base plate, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a base plate. (C) is a perspective view of a blade member. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the front decoration part and the like in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area) in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area) in another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing for demonstrating the payout passage (the payout time adjusting means) in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame constituent portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of being supported via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 16 is the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for ejecting a game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launch handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (variable resistor) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicates with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 having a built-in LED are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and by pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative pattern display device 42 and the like, which will be described later, can be pressed. The corresponding production is performed or the content of the production is changed.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses attached separately in a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides a game ball guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and a first special display device as a variable display means. 43L, a second special display device 43R, a fluctuation specifying lamp 40, and the like are arranged. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning openings such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, and a starting winning device 33a, 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, three balls are entered when the first starting winning device 33a is entered, two balls are entered when the second starting winning device 33b is entered, and the general winning opening 31 is entered. If there are balls, 10 games are paid out, and if there are balls in the variable winning device 32, 12 game balls are paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34, which is only passed by the game ball but does not enter (it is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. .. In addition, the first start winning device 33a, the general winning opening 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that the game ball moving in the game area can always enter or pass through. The two starting winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change state between an open state in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that does not win a prize in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 uses the out opening 36. It is discharged to the outside of the game area through it. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

A pair of left and right entry ports 151 are provided on the upper portion of the center frame 47, and the game balls that have entered the entry openings 151 pass through the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153 and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 to move the game ball. It may fall into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

At a lower position of the variable display device unit 35, a first start winning device 33a having a start winning opening in which a game ball can always win a prize is arranged. Further, the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is located directly above the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball guided by the lead-out groove 154 enters the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. It is configured to be a sphere. The first starting winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a.

A second start winning device 33b is arranged at a position below the first start winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of rotatably displaceable blade members 37 adjacent to the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is in a closed position extending vertically, the tip end portion of the blade member 37 is adjacent to the first start winning device 33a. As a result, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the second start winning device 33b and the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device 33b is closed so that the game ball cannot enter the start winning opening. It is in a state. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to an open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the start winning opening.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, as the first start winning means, the first start winning device 33a as the normal start dynamic winning means, the second starting winning means, and the open / close type starting winning means. The second start winning device 33b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, a unit in which the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized is referred to as a "starting winning unit 401".

A variable winning device 32 is arranged at a position below the starting winning unit 401. The variable winning device 32 is usually in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the case of a big hit state or the like. Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 is for a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a large winning opening for operating the large winning shutter. It is equipped with a solenoid and a count switch 223 that detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening, and by driving and controlling the solenoid for the big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter, the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) Is switched between the closed state and the open state.

Through gates 34 are arranged at positions on both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 35 in the game area. The through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

Further, when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In order to teach the result of the ball entry support lottery, a variable display is performed. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b have the first start winning switch 224a and the second start as the first start winning detection means for detecting the winning game ball, respectively. A second start winning switch 224b is provided as a winning detection means, and when a game ball is detected by the starting winning switches 224a and 224b, a lottery for whether or not to generate a big hit state or the like (win / fail lottery) ) Is performed, and the special display devices 43L and 43R, which will be described later, and the decorative symbol display device 42 perform variable display. Then, if the winner is won by the winning or losing lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a winning / failing lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning / failing lottery. Further, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning device 33b, and the blade member 37 is almost in the open position. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the state of low probability and low ball entry is referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability and high ball entry is referred to as "time reduction mode", and the state of high probability and high ball entry is high. A certain state is called "probability change mode".

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative symbol even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the variable display on the display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times, the process ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game is won in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and the case where the second starting winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip") is won. , Electric tulip "), the type of winning given does not change depending on whether the game ball is won or not in the winning or losing lottery (type judgment referred to when determining the type of winning state). The table is the same).

More specifically, the jackpot types are 15 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS"), 15 round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RN"), and 2 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS"). There is. Regarding "15RS" and "15RN", it is 1 that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As for the round, "15RS" is repeated 15 times, and then the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and after that is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. That is, although "15RS" and "15RN" are big hits (so-called "big hits with balls") in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, "2RS" is a large increase in game balls. Is a big hit that cannot be expected (so-called "big hit without a ball").

In addition, a "probability change mode" is given after the end of the jackpot state of "15RS", a "(special) probability change mode" is given after the end of the jackpot state of "2RS", and "time" is given after the end of the jackpot state of "15RN". "Shortened mode" (in this example, 100 times of variable display) is given. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the rate becomes "15RS" at a rate of 50%, the rate becomes "15RN" at a rate of 40%, and the rate becomes 10%. It becomes "2RS".

In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the first starting winning device 33a, and the second special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the second starting winning device 33b. The two special display devices 43R are each composed of two segment display devices, and are configured to be capable of displaying symbols, characters, numbers and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at a position visible to the player (in this example, a position where the game ball at the lower right of the game area cannot pass).

Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol is switched and displayed (variable display) on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. The second special display device 43R is configured to switch and display (variable display) a special symbol when the ball enters the ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

Further, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning / failing lottery, that is, "big hit" or "big hit" is determined by the special symbol when the variation display is stopped. , It is definitely displayed that it is "off". For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of lit segments) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), And when the predetermined time elapses, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when the "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and the big hit state occurs.

Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, it is also taught which of the jackpot types, that is, "15RS", "15RN", and "2RS", by the special symbol to be stopped. Further, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, and one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Further, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing the variable display or the decision display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed. If the variable display and the decision display are not performed in either case, "-" is displayed in both cases.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a normal symbol display device 41 (position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that variablely displays when the through gate 34 passes, and first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 for variable display according to the variable display is provided.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variable display of decorative symbols as identification information. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 assists the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and the display is displayed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display area. It is displayed sequentially (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). .. For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. It is stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to (for example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, so as to line up on a virtual effective line extending through the lower symbol display area. The same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area and the lower symbol display area), and the jackpot state is started. Of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the upper symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is basically stopped and displayed is basically the "first symbol display area". The lower symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the end. This is also referred to as a "third symbol display area".

Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the jackpot, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in, for example, the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area, which is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If doublet is displayed (when doublet is stopped), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of odd-numbered doublets, "15RS" is generated, and in the case of even-numbered doublets, "15RN" is generated.

In addition, the combination of decorative symbols other than doublets basically teaches "off", but in the case of a big hit of "2RS", the decorative symbols are specified on the effective line instead of doublets. (Combination of chance symbols, so-called doublet) is displayed as a stop. In the present embodiment, the mode in which "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas is a combination of chance symbols.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect of teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, the "probability change stage" that confirms that you are staying in the probabilistic mode, the "normal stage" that confirms that you are staying in the normal mode, and the "pull back" that you are staying in the time reduction mode. There is a "stage". That is, when the "15RS" is won, the stage shifts to the "probability change stage" after the jackpot state ends. Further, when the "15RN" is won, the stage shifts to the "pull-back stage" after the jackpot state ends, and further, when the fluctuation display is performed 100 times in the pull-back stage, the stage shifts to the "normal stage". In addition, in the present embodiment, as a kind of "probability change stage", there is a "special probability change stage" that shifts after the end of the jackpot state of "2RN". In the "special probability change stage", the background is slightly changed as compared with the normal stage and the effect balance is changed (for example, it becomes easy to select an effect pattern that is normally difficult to select).

Further, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variation display of the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R, the variation display for that amount is the same. It is configured to be performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b have won a prize. Depending on the game ball, up to 4 fluctuation displays (8 fluctuation displays in total) are reserved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b. Regardless of which of the variable display based on the incoming ball (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display"), the game is digested in the reserved order. That is, for example, the second variable display held after the first variable display already held is digested before the first variable display, and so on, so that the reserved order is changed. Therefore, it is not a structure in which either one is preferentially digested.

Further, the reserved number of the first variable display is arranged directly above the first special display device 43L and is lit and displayed by the first reserved lamp 46a capable of emitting blue light, and the reserved number of the second variable display is It is arranged directly above the second special display device 43R, and is lit by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four holding lamps 46a and 46b, which are the same as the maximum number of holdings for each of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display, and are the same number as the number of the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display held. Light. The display contents of the hold lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by the sub control device 262 described later. If a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is the decorative symbol. It is also taught in the display device 42. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 43, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed at the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A maximum of eight hold icons 461 are displayed, and the ones on the left are sequentially digested.

Further, regarding the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, there is no information as to whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, and basically which variable is used. Even if it corresponds to the display, it has a common aspect.

Further, on the variable display device unit 35 of the present embodiment (in this example, the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47), the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is the first variable display and the second variable display. A fluctuation specifying lamp 40 is provided to indicate which of the fluctuation displays is used. The fluctuation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED having a blue emission color and an LED having a red emission color, and when the first variation display is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42, the variation identification lamp 40 emits light in blue and the second variation. When displayed, it emits red light.

The ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to lightly display, for example, "○" or "×" as an ordinary symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the ordinary symbol is changed from "○" to "○". Switching display (variable display) is performed at high speed, such as "×" → "○" → .... Then, when the fluctuation display is stopped at the "○" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is configured to be done. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol to be suspended is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is suspended up to 4 times. In addition, the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol is arranged in the variable display device unit 35, and is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided with four holding lamps 44, which is the same as the maximum number of holdings for each fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and are lit by the same number as the number of holding fluctuation displays.

The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b (2). (Specified time) is longer than in the low entry state, (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state. (4) The number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than that in the low ball entry state, and (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. For example, it should be in a high state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the configurations (2) and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .. As a result, the game ball is likely to be frequently won in the second start winning device 33b, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed increases, and the player's holding ball is suppressed from being reduced. ..

However, in the present embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is the same as in the high ball entry state (1.86 seconds), and the ball was won in the ball entry support lottery. In this case, the time for the second start winning device 33b to be in the open state is also substantially the same (5.7 seconds) as in the high ball entry state (5.8 seconds). Furthermore, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery is also 15/233, which is a probability that it is relatively easy to win compared to a conventional pachinko machine that is less than 1/100. As a result, even in the low ball entry state, the second start winning device 33b is likely to be in a relatively open state, and the variation display of the special symbol is also likely to be suspended.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the rail 50 and the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow back through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

By the way, in this embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized into the starting winning unit 401. Hereinafter, the starting winning unit 401 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47 and the like.

The start winning unit 401 is separated from the substantially plate-shaped base plate 402 attached to the front surface of the game board 30 in an abutting state and the base plate 402 in front of the base plate 402 by a distance through which the game ball can pass. A front decorative portion 403 as a substantially disk-shaped front covering means (general portion) provided so as to cover at least the front of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. There is. The front decorative portion 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (for example, polycarbonate), and the front decorative portion includes a game ball that moves around the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It is configured to be visible via 403.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 47, the base plate 402 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, and the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are communicated with each other. A pair of upper and lower discharge holes 404 for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball into the rear of the game board 30 is formed through the opening. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided corresponding to the front of each discharge hole 404 formed in the base plate 402, and have a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward. It is provided with a receiving portion 405. The starting winning opening is configured by the opening formed in the upper part of the ball receiving portion 405. Further, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 405 is shaped to guide the game ball backward (provided to have a portion inclined downward downward), and the ball enters the ball receiving portion 405 through the starting winning opening. The game ball will be guided to the rear discharge hole 404.

The game nails erected on the front surface of the game board 30 include a pair of left and right life nails 406 provided above the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the first start winning device 33a. The game ball that has passed between 406 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a. In the present embodiment, the starting winning unit 401 is arranged below the life nail 406 so that the life nail 406 and the front decorative portion 403 do not overlap.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, the front side of the ball receiving portion 405 is blocked by the front decorative portion 403. In other words, the front wall portion of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is composed of the front decoration portion 403. In particular, in the present embodiment, each ball receiving portion 405 is integrally formed with the front decorative portion 403, and the ball receiving portion 405 is also made of a transparent or translucent resin material (similar to the front decorative portion 403). The ball receiving portion 405 of the first starting winning device 33a is made of a transparent resin). Hereinafter, the member in which the front decorative portion 403 and the ball receiving portion 405 are integrated is referred to as a “cover unit 407”.

Further, the cover unit 407 is provided with a mounting boss 408 for mounting the cover unit 407 on the base plate 402 integrally with each ball receiving portion 405. The boss hole of the mounting boss 408 is open rearward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the base plate 402 is formed with a mounting hole 409 corresponding to the mounting boss 408, and the mounting boss 408 and the mounting hole 409 are aligned with each other. By fixing the screws from the rear surface side of the base plate 402, the cover unit 407 can be attached to the base plate 402. It should be noted that the base plate 402 may be provided with a support rib that protrudes forward and supports the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 405.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base plate 402 of the present embodiment extends to the left and right sides from the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. Further, the extension portion is formed so as to project forward from the base plate 402, and a pair of left and right guides for a game ball moving in the game area on the left and right sides of the front decoration portion 403 to the front decoration portion 403 side. The slider 411 is provided. If the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, the game ball guided by the slider 411 falls on the blade member 37 in the open position with a relatively high probability and reaches the second start winning device 33b. It is designed to enter the ball. Further, the base plate 402 is formed with screw holes 412 for fixing the base plate 402 to the game board 30 with screws at the extended portion.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 47 and the like, in the present embodiment, the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405 is guided to the ball receiving portion 405 in accordance with the second starting winning device 33b. Only the blade member 37 that can be displaced between the open position and the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405 to the ball receiving portion 405 is provided. Pseudo-blade as a movable covering means that can be displaced between the functional position that can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the open position and the standby position that can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. A member 431 is provided. In this embodiment, the blade member 37 at the functional position constitutes the guiding means.

As shown in FIG. 46, since the blade member 37 has a role of mounting the game ball and guiding it to the ball receiving portion 405 when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the width (thickness) of the front and rear is larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is largely configured. On the other hand, in the pseudo blade member 431 arranged in front of the blade member 37 (between the blade member 37 and the front decorative portion 403), the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. In the case (see FIG. 47 (c)), the thickness is thinner than the blade member 37 so that the game ball can pass through the game area (between the pseudo blade member 431 and the base plate 402) behind the pseudo blade member 431. It is configured in.

Further, as a mechanism for operating the blade member 37, a blade side motor 421 as a blade side driving means for displaced the blade member 37, and a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 whose one end side is connected to the blade member 37 are used. It is provided on the other end side of the blade shaft 425, and includes a blade side gear 426 that is meshed with a blade side pinion 423 provided on the blade side drive shaft 422 of the blade side motor 421. The blade-side motor 421 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to the main control device 261 described later. Further, the blade shaft 425 is fixed to the blade member 37 in a state of being inserted into a substantially circular through hole 427 (see FIG. 46 (b)) formed in the blade member 37 and penetrating back and forth.

Further, as a mechanism for operating the pseudo-blade member 431, a pseudo-side motor 432 as a pseudo-side drive means for displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 and a substantially columnar pseudo-shaft 433 whose one end side is connected to the pseudo-blade member 431. And a pseudo-side gear 436 provided on the other end side of the pseudo-shaft 433 and meshed with a pseudo-side pinion 435 provided on the pseudo-side drive shaft 434 of the pseudo-side motor 432. The pseudo-side motor 432 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262 described later.

Further, the pseudo blade 433 is inserted inside a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425, and the pseudo blade member 431 is provided with respect to the front end portion of the pseudo shaft 433 protruding forward from the front end portion of the blade shaft 425. Is attached, and the pseudo side gear 436 is attached to the rear end portion of the pseudo shaft 433 protruding rearward from the rear end portion of the blade shaft 425. With this configuration, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to extend (almost) on the same straight line. Has been done.

In addition, the front end portion of the pseudo shaft 433 has a substantially D-shaped cross section, and the front end portion is inserted into a substantially semicircular recess (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431. In this state, it is fixed to the pseudo-blade member 431. Further, on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431, a substantially columnar shaft support convex portion 437 formed so as to project toward the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431 is provided as the concave portion is formed. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, a concave bearing portion 438 into which the shaft support convex portion 437 is inserted is formed on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403. As a result, the front end side of the pseudo shaft 433 and, by extension, the front end side of the blade shaft 425 are supported, and deformation and misalignment of the pseudo shaft 433 and the blade shaft 425 can be suppressed. It should be noted that a bearing portion that pivotally supports the lower part of the outer peripheral edge on the rotation center side of the blade member 37 or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the deformed whale is visually recognized in the start winning unit 401. That is, as shown in FIG. 44, the substantially disk-shaped front decorative portion 403 basically includes a character display portion 441 in which a whale is drawn in a colored transparent hue, and other than that (around the character display portion 441). ) Is a general part 442 that is colorless and transparent (a colored transparent color having a hue lighter than that of the character display part 441 is also possible). However, the forelimbs of the whale are not drawn on the character display unit 441. Instead, the forelimbs of the whale are represented by the pseudo-wing member 431.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 46, and the like, the pseudo-blade member 431 has a shape (fillet shape) that resembles the forelimbs of a whale, and the character display unit 441 is colored (for example, translucent dark blue). It is made of a colored transparent resin material. The pseudo-blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position so that the forelimbs of the whale project laterally to the body of the whale. In the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 (general portion 442).

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), in the present embodiment, the pseudo-blade member 431 in the standby position is located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decorative portion 403 (most of the pseudo-blade members 431 are located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decorative portion 403. It is configured to be hidden by the character display unit 441). In the present embodiment, the whale corresponds to the third object, the portion other than the front leg of the whale corresponds to the first object, the character display unit 441 of the front decoration unit 403 corresponds to the first object display unit, and the whale corresponds to the first object display unit. The front limbs of the whale correspond to the second object, and the pseudo-blade member 431 corresponds to the second object display unit. Further, the state in which the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position corresponds to the completed display state, and the state in which the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the standby position corresponds to the unfinished display state.

Further, the blade member 37 is also configured to be located behind the character display unit 441 when it is in the closed position (the entire blade member 37 in the closed position is hidden by the character display unit 441). In addition, the blade member 37 of the present embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Further, the blade member 37 has a flat (smooth) surface on the upper surface (game ball guide surface) and the front surface when the blade member 37 is in the open position. The front surface and the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are also flat surfaces.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 47, the pseudo-blade member 431 has a larger area than the blade member 37 in front view, and the blade member 37 is in the open position and is pseudo. Both when the blade member 431 is in the functional position and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the entire front surface of the blade member 37 is covered by the pseudo blade member 431. It has come to be. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the pseudo blade member 431 is on the functional position side. The side portion is configured to be located on the open position side of the blade member 37 on the open position side. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 (side portion on the standby position side). ) Is such that the upper surface (game ball guide surface, surface on the standby position side) of the blade member 37 is located above (closed position side).

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 does not operate independently, and the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position. Is also configured to displace the pseudo-blade member 431 from the standby position to the functional position while covering the front of the blade member 37. Further, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position while covering the front of the blade member 37. There is. On the other hand, the pseudo-blade member 431 may operate independently, and as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position, but the blade member 37 is in the closed position. Is also configured to occur. That is, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it is possible to derive a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position). In the present embodiment, the pseudo-blade opening means is configured by the pseudo-blade member 431 and a mechanism for operating the pseudo-blade member 431 (including an operation control function described later).

The area of the game area whose front is covered by the front decorative portion 403 (hereinafter, also referred to as “covered area”) is covered at a position below the second start winning device 33b (ball receiving portion 405). A pseudo-winning detection switch 445 is provided as a pseudo-winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in an area. Since the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 is provided in the game area, the game ball will continue to move in the game area on the downstream side of the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 even after being detected by the pseudo-winning detection switch 445. ..

Further, the covering area is provided with a guide stand 446 as a pseudo winning guidance means, which is provided so as to project forward from the base plate 402 and guides the game ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo winning detection switch 445. ing. The guide bases 446 are provided in pairs on the left and right, and the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 is mounted so as to be sandwiched between them. Further, the guide stand 446 has a curved shape along the lower edge portion of the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 when the start winning unit 401 is viewed from the front, and further, the guide stand 446 and the guide stand 446 are formed. The entire pseudo-winning detection switch 445 is configured so that the front is covered by the character display unit 441 (so as to be hidden by the character display unit 441).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, the front decoration is placed in the lower position of the area covered in the front by the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific covering area”) in the game area. Although the front is covered by the portion 403, there is a region in which the base plate 402 is not arranged. As shown in FIG. 47 (c) and the like, in the present embodiment, in such a region, a plurality of the pseudo-blade member 431 (below the specific covering region) at the functional position are adjacent to each other. In the example, two game nails (hereinafter referred to as "guide nails 448") are erected on the game board 30. The plurality of guide nails 448 are arranged downward as they are located closer to the central portion side (guide stand 446 side) in the width direction of the start winning unit 401, and basically, a game in which the guide nails 448 are in contact with the upper surface side. The ball is guided to the guide table 446 side (the game ball in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448 is not always placed on the guide table 446, but it is placed with a relatively high probability).

For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the game ball hardly contacts the guide nail 448 or the guide base 446 located directly below the blade member 37. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (c), when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it enters the covering region and moves to the side of the blade member 37 in the closed position. The game ball to be used may come into contact with the guide nail 448 and be placed on the guide base 446, or may be directly placed on the guide base 446. The guide nail 448 is arranged adjacent to the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position and the character display unit 441 of the front decorative portion 403, and the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position is also viewed from the front. Since the game ball is continuously extended to the character display unit 441, the game ball guided to the guide base 446 side by the guide nail 448 may continue to be hidden behind the pseudo blade member 431 and the character display unit 441. Yes, in this case, it becomes difficult to follow the movement of the game ball with the eyes. In this embodiment, the guide stand 446 and the guide nail 448 constitute the course changing means.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the front frame set 14, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is a payout passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, in the state where the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end portion of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame set 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate ream passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged flow to the lower plate ream passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate ream passage 71), and the lower plate ream It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are stagnant in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice on the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221 and the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. The first board surface relay board relays the winning port switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown, a solenoid for a large winning opening is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 to open the large winning opening with the variable winning device 32. Further, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a blade side motor 421 that drives the blade member 37 to open and close as described above. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, probability change mode, etc.), a front frame set 14 and an inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information on the opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower plate full tank error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor or the like. Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside is installed. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game ball collected by the above-mentioned ball recovery mechanism flows in, and the game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won in each winning opening such as the general winning opening 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251 the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back surface side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam of the payout motor occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotated in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back surface side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided in the lower right portion of the inner frame 12 on the front side (right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 5) on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 to turn off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure resolution). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input the power failure signal SK1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 includes a winning port switch 221, a count switch 223, a starting winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, various switches of the handle 18, and the like. Various electric parts such as various detection switches, various boards, a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and a blade side motor 421 for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. It is equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, the input / output port 554 includes a speaker SP, hold lamps 46a and 46b, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, various lighting units and lamps 102 and 104, and a pseudo winning detection switch 445 provided in the start winning unit 401. A pseudo-side motor 432 or the like for operating the pseudo-blade member 431 is connected.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control. In the present embodiment, the display control means is configured by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the above, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters, similarly to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to input the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and the initial setting is made. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to be restored. There are three payout return commands sent in case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the emission control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 has a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the above, and it takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing). The launching device 60 is driven on condition that the launching device 60 is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is carried out. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the operation power required for each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volt, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the elimination of a power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the hit / miss random number counter C1 as the hit / miss random number generation means used for the hit / miss lottery for whether or not to generate the jackpot state, and the type used for determining the jackpot type (type lottery). The determination counter C2, the variable selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit / fail random number counter C1, and the first. The first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the second start winning device 33b used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) are open. It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball entry support lottery. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery for each reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time, that is, the effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores a special variable hold area as a hold storage area for storing the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4 for storing the values. There is a variable hold area. The normal variable hold area includes four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4th areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special variable holding area includes eight holding areas (holding first to holding eighth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the special variable holding area, the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Each value of the counter C3 is stored in time series. In the present embodiment, the first variation display and the second variation display (variation display in the special display devices 43L and 43R) can be held up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 695, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 695), and then is the lower limit value 0 as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / miss random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 695), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,307", which is a high probability. The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the state (probability variation mode) is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two winning / failing determination tables as winning value storage means referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to a big hit. , "7, 307" is stored as a jackpot value, and there is a second hit / fail determination table in which "8-16, 308 to 316" are stored as jackpot values.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, reach the upper limit value (that is, 19), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and the first start winning device 33a). There is only one type determination table because the distribution of the jackpot types is the same regardless of which jackpot corresponds to the entry into either of the second start winning devices 33b). Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (the type lottery is performed), and the determined type jackpot state is determined. It will be granted.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the upper limit value (that is, 238), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, after the reach state is generated for the decorative symbol by the variable selection counter C3, the reach state is also generated as the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The lottery is to draw "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and "completely off" where the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is acquired as a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach type, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a. Obtained with the first reach determination table referred to when determining the reach type (when no jackpot is made) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. A second reach determination table is provided, which is referred to when determining the reach type (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the variable selection counter C3. In the first reach determination table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the front-back off reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the front-back off, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the complete off. On the other hand, in the second reach determination table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the front-back off reach, C3 = 2 to 11 corresponds to the reach other than the front-back off, and C3 = 12 to 238 corresponds to the complete off.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

Further, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 59, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then becomes the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, the variable type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 37, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of the decorative symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer symbol variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (middle symbol in this example) is stopped is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stopped symbol.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the upper limit value (that is, 232 is reached, and then the lower limit value is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired. The number of winning random numbers in the ball state is 15, and the range is "1 to 15." On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers in the high ball state is 232. The range is "1 to 232". That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has a low ball entry support determination table referred to in the ball entry support lottery in a low ball entry state and a high ball entry state. A support determination table for high ball entry, which is referred to in the ball entry support lottery, is prepared. When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays the fluctuation. Is performed for a predetermined time, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). Ru). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

Further, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (695 and 19 in the present embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 238, 232), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds for the first variable display triggered by a prize in the first start winning device 33a, and a second hold counter Na triggered by a prize in the second start winning device 33b. The second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the variable display, the total number of hold that counts the total number of hold of the variable display (the total number of the hold of the first variable display and the hold of the second variable display) A counter Nx is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, is it the first fluctuation display based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, or is it based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b? A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is the second variable display is stored. Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set to ON", and "the second variable display is stored in the variable storage area". "The information indicating that the information is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set on".

First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined by the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb and the hold total number counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the hit / fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer) updated in the random number update process of step S303 are used. Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the special fluctuation hold area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is used as a deviation. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches with either "7" or "307", which is the value stored in the first hit / miss determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is described in a simplified manner, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "307", and if a positive determination is made by either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in the step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made even in the above step S5101, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. When a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / miss determination table "8 to 16, 308". It is determined whether or not it is any of "~ 316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are values that are big hits only in the probabilistic mode. Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match, as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, in addition to the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the first hit / miss flag and the second hit / miss flag are not separately provided, and the hit / miss random number storage area has a big hit state. It is configured to store (overwrite) information on whether or not it occurs. That is, for convenience of explanation, storing the information in which the jackpot state occurs in the hit / miss random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first hit / miss flag and the second hit / miss flag.

In addition to the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, a hit / miss flag is separately provided to keep the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored at this point, and the fluctuation display described later is performed. In the variation display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and the hit / fail may be determined.

Next, the type determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0 to 9" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value "10" corresponding to "2RS" in consideration of the type determination table in step S5204. , 11 ”is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then this process ends.

Next, the second reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, when a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is newly taken into consideration in step S5402. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front-back flag indicating the occurrence of the front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, the front and rear flags are not separately provided, and the information that the reach random number storage area is "out of front and back reach". Is memorized (overwritten). In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front and rear flags.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation" by referring to the reach determination table in step S5404. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 11". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5405.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, the starting command setting process is performed. In the starting command, the hold-stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) is triggered by either the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. The information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). ..

After the process of step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning the first starting winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S510, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na and the hold total number counter Nx are incremented by one.

In the following step S512, the values of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in an empty holding area (winning / failing random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) in the special fluctuation holding area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the hit / fail determination process based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the hit / fail determination process based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b are common, and by extension, the same game. In the mode, the jackpot winning probability in the winning / losing lottery is the same.

In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type. The details of the type determination process have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the type determination process based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the type determination process based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b are common, and by extension, the first start. Depending on the type of jackpot that is awarded, there are cases where a jackpot is won in a winning / failing lottery based on winning a ball in the winning device 33a and a case where a jackpot is won in a winning / failing lottery based on winning a ball in the second starting winning device 33b. The distribution is the same.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the first reach determination process for determining the reach type is performed.

Here, the first reach determination process in step S515 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, when a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is newly taken into consideration in step S5302. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front-back flag indicating the occurrence of the front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation" by referring to the reach determination table in step S5304. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5305.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after step S515, in step S516, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the hit / fail determination process is performed. , The type determination process, and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the random number counter C1 is acquired is provided, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is subjected to the pass / fail determination process and the type. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the items are stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

The process of extracting the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 is also stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S513 (step S5101, step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first hit / miss determination process, and the determination result is obtained. The processing of step S5102 and step S5104 to store (set the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through-gate passage process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, a random number related to the result is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power supply cutoff occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the subsequent step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the following step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power cutoff. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is instructed to the display control device 45 to be displayed (variable display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described.

"Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. In the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "10 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

"Super Reach" is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

"Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), characters with a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed, which is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach, PR1 and PR2, are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time differs depending on the type of premium reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "2RS" is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the chance symbols, but when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, a peculiar variable display is displayed. (Chance fluctuation) is being performed. As an example of chance fluctuation, after the reach state occurs, if the reach is out of front and back or the reach is out of front and back, the fluctuation will continue even after the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Along with the effect, a variable display is finally performed in which "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas.

In addition, the variable display time that is "completely off" that does not reach any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command and displays it after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. It specifies six categories: combination and combination of completely out of place symbols. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

If you win a probabilistic jackpot (“15RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variable jackpot with balls”) where you can expect an increase in the number of game balls, or when you win a normal jackpot (“15RN”) where you can expect an increase in the number of game balls. , Also referred to as "normal jackpot with balls"), the decorative symbol with a number pattern is stopped and displayed in a doublet combination on the decorative symbol display device 42. In the present embodiment, in the case of "probability change jackpot with balls", the probability variation jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of odd numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, or 2 , 4, 6, 8 The variable display is stopped and displayed in any combination of the normal jackpot symbols, which is a combination of even-numbered doublets, and in the case of "normal jackpot with balls" , Normally, the variable display will be stopped and displayed by the combination of jackpot symbols.

Then, when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command of the probability variation jackpot with a payout, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combinations of the doublets of 1 to 9 as a stop symbol, and the payout is made. Yes When a normal jackpot symbol command is received, one of the combinations of doubles, 4, 6, and 8 doublets is determined as the stop symbol.

In addition, if a winning probability change jackpot (“2RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation jackpot without payout”) in which an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected is won, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays “3” and “3” from the top. The combination of the chance symbols of "4" and "1" will be stopped and displayed. There is only one type of combination of chance symbols in this embodiment.

The combination of the front-back and front-rear symbols corresponds to the "front-back off-reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of symbols other than the front and rear deviation corresponds to the "reach other than the front and rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which even reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the combination of the front / rear off symbols, the combination of the symbols other than the front / rear off, and the combination of the completely out of place symbols, it is "off".

As will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives these out-of-order symbol commands, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of the symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In this embodiment, three commands are prepared for the symbol command for disengagement, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one type of symbol command for disengagement, and the sub-control device 262 can be used to display a decorative symbol. It may be configured to determine the combination.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59, 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the special display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the normal display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed with respect to the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37). The details of this start winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to the step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and the value varies as well. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S213 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Will be. In the power failure processing, first, the generation of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in.

After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the hit situation storage area described later is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the state is currently other than the big hit state. In the "big hit state", the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 are set. It includes a round period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started. ..

In the hit status storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, "1" in the opening period and the interval period, and "2" in the round period in the jackpot state. It is configured so that "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is in a jackpot state, this process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a special figure to be described in detail is being displayed in step S802. By looking at the setting status of the flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed by the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, when the special map display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special map display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which corresponds to the state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are turned on. The variable display is turned off when it is stopped and displayed.

Then, when a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, when neither the jackpot state nor the fluctuation display is performed, the process proceeds to step S803, and the ball is entered into the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the hold total counter Nx, which counts the total number of holds of the variable display triggered by the change, is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no variation display is reserved, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, when even one variation display is reserved and stored, 1 is subtracted from the pending total number counter Nx in step S804.

In the following step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 8 area of the special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S806, that is, when the data corresponds to the first variation display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S807. do. In the following step S808, a process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, in step S809, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Further, in the case of a negative determination in step S806, that is, when the data corresponds to the second variation display based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the data corresponds to the second variation display from the second hold counter Nb in step S810. Is subtracted. In the following step S811, a process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S809, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, the mode storage area described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any one of "11", "12", and "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, and "12" corresponds to the time reduction mode. Corresponds to, and "21" corresponds to the probabilistic mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area to determine whether or not it is in a high probability state.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S901, that is, in the high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the hit / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the hit / miss random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if it is "15RS", the 15RS pattern setting process (process for setting the variation pattern command and the symbol command) is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "15RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The fluctuation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variable type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variable type counter CS2 and the variable time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S907, 2RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S915.

If a negative determination is made in step S907, a 15RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S902 or step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won, in step S910, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation hold area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. 16. It is determined whether or not the reach determination process (see FIG. 17) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is “reach other than front / rear deviation”, the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the deviation fluctuation pattern setting process is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In step S915, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed by the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on. As a result, it is shown that the condition for switching display (variable display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the following step S916, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the special figure display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device. At the same time as the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the symbols based on the symbol commands. After the end of step S916, the variation display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the pass / fail determination process of steps S505 and 513, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning / failing based on the winning / failing flag and the situation at that time. Further, the second pass / fail determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S911, step S913, and step S914.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, when variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S813 is positively determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, the switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the special display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, deviation, and the like. Further, a control signal indicating that the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped is also output to the sub control device 262. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the symbol command and the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information on the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. There is no need to add. Further, again, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for staging). There is.

Subsequently, in step S816, after performing the initial setting of the hit state and the discrimination information setting process for measuring the period of the time reduction mode, this process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set by referring to the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, if the jackpot is "15RS" or "15RN", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is determined in step S1003. "15" is set in the round number counter for discrimination.

In the following step S1004, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for control during the hit state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1006, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "8" for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, and the variable winning device 32 is used. If it is determined that the ball has entered, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1007, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, it is taught that the promotion of the appearance jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the player won "15RS" in the jackpot state immediately after that. Or, when an odd number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it may be taught that "15RS" has been won in the jackpot state immediately after that).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, "2" is set in the round number counter in step S1008. After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1010, a value "500" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set for the special variable timer, "8" is set for the winning counter in step S1011, and the opening is set in step S1012. Set the command. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1013 whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the time reduction mode is used. If a negative determination is made in step S1013, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S1013, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1014 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "15RN", the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set for the fluctuation count counter, and a special display is made. Every time the variation display of the devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1014.

In the following step S1015, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1015, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still lined at the end degree of the hit state. If not, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1015, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1016. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1016, in step S1017, a time saving end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this process ends.

Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, the present process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the hit status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if a jackpot state is in effect (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , The value of the special variable timer is subtracted by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit status storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1205. In the following step S1206, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, it is determined whether or not the hit is "15RS" or "15RN" (whether or not it is other than "2RS").

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1208, a value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer. do.

After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, a process for opening the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1210, a round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round is issued. Set. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1211. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started, "3" is set for the hit status storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not the time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1212.

In the following step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and "1" is set for the hit status storage area. After that, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer in step S1216. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer in step S1217.

After step S1216 or step S1217, in step S1218, "8" is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1219, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S1221 and is variable. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, every time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, 1 is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1221, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, if the opportunity to end the round arrives without waiting for the elapse of the round setting period, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, if eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when all the rounds in the jackpot state have been digested, the process proceeds to step S1222, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1223, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1223, the value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer in step S1225.

After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, "7" is set for the winning counter. When the process of setting the ending after step S1222 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by inputting a provisional numerical value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1226, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1226, in step S1227, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in the following step S1228, an ending command for transmitting information to the effect that the ending is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1229 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 15RN flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1403, "100" is set for the fluctuation count counter. The fluctuation count counter completes the fluctuation display for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping that. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time saving start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the time saving mode is set. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1405. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1405, in step S1406, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1407, a probability change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the probability change mode is set. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, a special start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the special probability change mode, which is a kind of probability change mode, is set in step S1408. After that, this process ends.

The special probability variation mode has the same numerical values as the probability variation mode, such as the winning probability of the winning / failing lottery, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type, the reach occurrence rate, and the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery, and the sub control device 262. Only a part of the effect content (ratio of selected effect patterns, etc.) is selected and determined on the side, and there is no distinction between the special probability change mode and the main control device 261 side (it is simply treated as a probability change mode). Further, regarding the processing after step S1405, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON, and the winning type of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. The random number storage area may be referred to to determine whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON, and if a negative determination is made, a predetermined error process may be executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, in step S1230, “0” indicating that the hit situation storage area is not in the big hit state is set. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command for transmitting information to the effect that the jackpot state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the flag for displaying the normal map, which indicates whether or not the variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, is on. When the flag for displaying a normal figure is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable value.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variation display of the normal symbol is reserved, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

In the following step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S2105, the normal symbol fluctuation setting process for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41 is executed.

Here, the normal map fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, the flag displaying the normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol is being variablely displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. If the affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if the jackpot state is not obtained, whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability change mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "465" to 1.86 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high-entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is won, the ball entry support lottery is won in step S2306. Turn on the ball entry support flag to indicate that. After step S2306, in step S2307, a release confirmation command is set as release schedule information informing the sub control device 262 that it is decided to open the second start winning device 33b. After that, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in a jackpot state or a low ball entry state, in step S2308, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set to "465" to set the timer to 1.86 seconds. Further, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 15". In the low ball entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 15".

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2309, that is, if the ball entry support lottery is won, the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery is won is set on in step S2306, and step S2307 is performed. After setting the release confirmation command in, this process ends. The variable display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be set appropriately for each pachinko machine model. For example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state can be set. , It may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, this process ends. If a control signal to start the variation display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting in the normal symbol variation setting process, the normal symbol display device is used. At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as an ordinary symbol, and if the displayed "○" is "×", "×". If so, it is switched (variable) to "○" and displayed.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the fluctuation display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106 to subtract the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal map display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag for displaying the normal map is turned off in step S2108, and the normal map stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if it is a win (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights only for a few seconds), and if it is not, "×" is displayed. Stop and display the design.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the normal figure discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is completed. Here, the normal map discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 5 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (residual time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "1450" to .8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state.

In the following step S2411, a support period start command for notifying the sub control device 262 that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set. Further, in step S2412, a blade opening command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that the timing for opening the second start winning device 33b has arrived. After that, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b should be set to 5.7 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "1425". Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set for the opening number counter to open the second start winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be open, and step S2411. In, the support period start command is set, and in step S2412, the blade release command is set, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, the switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2111, and this process is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", it is switched to "x", and if it is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the timing of the normal display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normal variable timer is usually subtracted by 1 in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normally variable flag is on. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the opening time of the predetermined second start winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and a blade closing command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that the timing for closing the second start winning device 33b has arrived. .. Then, in step S2206, the normally variable flag is turned off. In the following step S2207, the value of the open count counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2208, the second start winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2209, it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2209, the support period flag is turned off in step S2210. Further, in step S2211, a support period end command for notifying the sub control device 262 that the period for opening the second start winning device 33b has ended is set. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning ball support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on the result. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "250") is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212. After step S2212, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the interval period is between the second start winning device 33b being opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2213. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2213, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2213, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2214, and the value corresponding to the opening time for the normal variable timer in step S2215 (in this example, in the high ball entry state; 1450 ”, in the low ball entry state;“ 1425 ”) is set, and in step S2216, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state. After that, in step S2217, the blade opening command is set, and then this process ends.

When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state and a specified number (for example, one) of game balls are entered into the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b May be configured to be closed immediately (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b is detected, and a positive determination is made. In some cases, it may be configured to move to step S2205).

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the receive interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting a command transmitted from the main control device 261 when the payout control device 311 receives the command. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the command reception process transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received, but is shown in FIG. 30, for example. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup error is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process of initializing the RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S3123 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control unit 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305, whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, whether it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the harmful effects of. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power is cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is jammed, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3205, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, the lower plate is full, the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full. Execute the setting of the dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the special state without a tank ball, the setting without a tank ball is executed, the special state without a tank ball disappears, and the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, the payout quantity setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. As described above, the starting command includes information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball, and the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating the existence, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the reach type are included.

The hold information storage area of the sub control device 262 includes eight hold areas (hold first to hold eighth areas) and one execution area, similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. In the hold information storage area, according to the reception history of the starting command, the information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, the jackpot type, the reach type, the first variable display or the second variable display is supported. Information (variation information) related to the fluctuation display such as information on whether or not the game is available is stored in chronological order. As a result, not only the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262.

Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of variable information held in the reserved information storage area is incremented by one. Further, in step S4103, information on whether or not the game is a jackpot included in the starting command, information on whether the jackpot type, reach type, first variation display or second variation display is supported, etc. are stored in the hold information storage area. Store in the first of the vacant reserved areas.

In the following step S4104, the notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a staging display related to each other is intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous advance notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous advance notice and the value of the advance notice type counter for determining the type of continuous advance notice are acquired, and the counter value is set in the hold information storage area. Of these, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4103.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches an upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to 0, which is a lower limit value. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the advance notice information storage process, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail determination table and the advance notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4104, in step S4105, it is determined whether or not the information newly stored in the hold area corresponds to the first variation display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the off state is turned on in step S4106. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4105, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the off state is turned on in step S4107. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light.

After step S4106 or step S4107, in step S4108, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4108, when the value of the variable hold counter Nd is "2" or more, the jackpot type and reach are based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the hold information storage area. Refer to the advance notice hit / miss judgment table corresponding to each type and game mode, and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute continuous notice, refer to the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, and game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the hold information storage area. And decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, turn on the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Further, in the present embodiment, after step S4108, in step S4109, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed. After step S4109, this process ends.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 43A, the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the ball entry detection compatible display means is an image object imitating a “floating ring”. ing. In the hold display area 462, a maximum of eight hold icons 461 can be displayed. Further, the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment displays the "main hold icon 463" as a ball entry detection compatible display indicating that the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is held, and the main hold icon 463. There is a "temporary hold icon 464" as a precursor display that may be displayed as a pre-stage.

As the pattern of the aspect of the holding icon 463, "the striped pattern of the floating ring is blue", "the striped pattern of the floating ring is red", and "character A using the floating ring (FIG. 43 (b)). 463a) "see" is displayed, and "character B using a floating ring (see 463b in FIG. 43 (c))" is displayed. On the other hand, the temporary hold icon 464 is an image object in which the "floating ring", which is the basic aspect of the hold icon 463, is blurred (thinned). The character A and the character B may be of one type or a plurality of types, respectively.

Further, as the display pattern of the hold icon 461, the pattern in which the hold icon 463 is suddenly displayed and the hold icon 463 are displayed so as to change from the temporary hold icon 464 after the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed. There is a pattern (the pattern is also referred to as "via a precursor"). Further, as described later, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is associated with the winning expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state (big hit expectation), and the display pattern of the hold icon 461 suggests the jackpot expectation (the jackpot expectation). It is configured to perform a look-ahead hold notice effect).

Here, the hold icon setting process performed in step S4109 of the hold information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

First, in step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter used when determining the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is acquired and stored in the hold icon information storage area of the corresponding hold area in the hold information storage area. The icon lottery random number counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 199, the upper limit value (that is, 199) is reached, and then the lower limit value is returned to 0. .. The icon lottery random number counter is updated periodically, and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer each time. In step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter is acquired from the counter buffer.

Next, in step S4302, the icon lottery random number counter stored in the hold icon information storage area is referred to with reference to the hold icon pattern storage table that stores the correspondence between the value of the icon lottery random number counter and the display pattern of the hold icon 461. The display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined based on the value.

As shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of hold icon pattern storage tables are provided. In this embodiment, there are two types: one for big hits, which is taken into consideration in response to fluctuation information that teaches big hits, one for front and back, which is taken into consideration in response to fluctuation information, and one for reach other than front and back. There are those for disengagement other than before and after being taken into consideration in response to the fluctuation information, and those for other (complete disengagement).

Regarding the hold icon pattern storage table for big hits, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to "a floating ring with a blue stripe pattern (changed from the temporary hold icon 464) via the precursor". However, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "60 to 139", it corresponds to the "floating ring with red stripes via the precursor", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "140 to 158", it corresponds to "via the precursor". Corresponds to "Character A", corresponds to "Character B via precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "59", and corresponds to "Viamin via precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "160 to 179". It corresponds to "a floating ring with a blue stripe pattern without a sign", and corresponds to "a floating ring with a red stripe pattern without a precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "180 to 199".

Regarding the hold icon pattern storage table for front and back deviation, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to the "blue striped floating ring via the precursor", and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is " In the case of "60 to 99", it corresponds to "floating ring with red stripes via precursor", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "100 to 104", it corresponds to "character A via precursor" and icon lottery. Corresponds to "blue striped floating ring without precursor" when the value of the random number counter is "105 to 184", and "red without precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "185 to 199". Corresponds to "striped floating ring".

Regarding the hold icon pattern storage table for non-front and back, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to the "blue striped floating ring via the precursor", and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is Corresponds to "red-striped float via precursor" in the case of "60-89", and "blue-striped float without precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "90-189". Corresponds to "a floating ring with a red stripe pattern without a precursor" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "190 to 199".

For other pending icon pattern storage tables, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 19", it corresponds to the "blue striped floating ring via the precursor", and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is " In the case of "20 to 199", it corresponds to "a floating ring with a blue stripe pattern without a precursor".

In other words, the red-striped pattern has a higher expectation of a big hit than the blue-striped pattern, and the red-striped pattern is more likely to occur via the precursor, and further, the character with a higher expectation of a jackpot via the precursor. A and character B may be derived. In particular, when the character B is displayed, it can be grasped that the jackpot state occurs after the end of the corresponding variation display at that time.

Then, in step S4302, the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding fluctuation display is determined based on various information stored in the hold area of the hold information storage area, and the hold icon pattern storage table to be referred to is determined according to the fluctuation pattern. do. Further, it is determined which value of the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to the display pattern of the hold icon 461, and the information indicating the display pattern of the hold icon 461 determined to correspond is provided in the corresponding hold area. Is stored in the hold icon information storage area (determines the display pattern of the hold icon 461).

The display pattern of the hold icon 461 in which the character B is displayed in the hold icon information storage area of the hold area of the hold information storage area and the hold icon information storage area of the execution area when it is determined in step S4302 that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot. Check if the information indicating is stored, and if it is stored, refer to another hold icon pattern storage table (for example, for back and forth) instead of the hold icon pattern storage table for jackpot It may be configured to do so.

After step S4302, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the hold icon 461 determined in step S4302 is the hold icon 461 via the precursor. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4303, the hold change flag of the corresponding hold area is turned on in step S4304. The hold change flag indicates that the temporary hold icon 464 is scheduled to change to the main hold icon 463, and in the present embodiment, the hold change flag is set to ON, so that the hold change icon is stored in the corresponding hold area. The temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in response to the change information (in other words, the hold change flag indicates whether or not the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed). Further, the hold change flag is provided in each hold area of the hold information storage area.

After step S4304 or when a negative determination is made in step S4303, the hold icon display process is executed in step S4305. Here, a process for additionally displaying the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463 or temporary hold icon 464) determined in step S4302 is performed on the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, regarding the hold icon 461, the first variation display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the first variation display based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. 2 It is a common mode in which it is not specified which of the variable displays corresponds to. However, by confirming the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 and confirming the transition of the lighting mode of the holding lamps 46a and 46b, it is determined which of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is the fluctuation display based on the ball. Is configured to allow

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, if a negative determination is made after step S3903 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3915.

In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper / middle / lower upper / middle / lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, reach the upper limit value (that is, 8), and then return to 0.

Then, when a symbol command indicating to stop the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 261, for example, the counter value is 0 based on a table (a table that associates the counter value and the decorative symbol) that is not shown. If it is "1" (doublet), if it is 1, "2" (doublet), and so on, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the symbol command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. You may do it.

Further, when a symbol command indicating to stop the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2 to 4, it is "4". The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as (doublet), "6" (doublet) for 5, 6 and "8" (doublet) for 7,8.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete. It is stored in one of the outlier symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if it is the update time of the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined and the combination of reach symbols is (YES in S4006), and in step S4007, whether or not the combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). To determine. If affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-order symbols. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-bounds symbols (front and back out reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer, and this process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear deviation (reach other than front and rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is performed. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and rear deviations of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Further, when the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the out-of-design counters CL, CM, and CR is the out-of-design (completely out-of-design) combination. The combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, the value of the fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1 in step S4202.

After step S4202, in step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information such as the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 8 area of the hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

In the following step S4204, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the first fluctuation display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the lit state is turned off in step S4205. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4204, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the lit state is turned off in step S4206.

After step S4205 or step S4206, in step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4108) of the execution area of the reserved information storage area is on, and if it is negatively determined, the continuous notice is given. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, what is the type, and if it is not a big hit, what is the reach type, etc., based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing in the corresponding variation display.

After step S4207, in step S4208, if there is a pending change flag that is set to be on, a process of turning it off is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change flag of the predetermined hold area is set to ON, the corresponding hold icon 461 is configured to be displayed in the mode of the temporary hold icon 464. .. That is, for example, when the information for displaying the hold icon 461 via the precursor (see FIG. 39, etc.) is stored in the hold icon information storage area of the hold area, the hold change flag of the hold area is turned on. If so, the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed as the hold icon 461 corresponding to the hold area, and when the hold change flag of the hold area is turned off, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the hold area is temporarily held. Instead of displaying the icon 464, the hold icon 463 will be displayed.

In the following step S4209, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, since the information related to the hold icon 461 is also shifted in the data shift process in step S4203, the hold area in which such information is stored and the hold icon 461 in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 are stored. The hold icon 461 is to be redrawn in order to correspond to the display location of. Therefore, in the hold display area 462, every time one variable display is digested (executed), the hold icon 461 located on the leftmost side is deleted, and the hold icon 461 placed on the right side thereof is deleted. Is shifted to the left by one (the display location moves). Further, when the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed, when the hold icon 461 is shifted, the temporary hold icon 464 changes to the main hold icon 463 (in the hold display area 462, for example, FIG. The display that changes from the aspect of 43 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 43 (b)) is derived.

After step S4209, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the temporary hold icon 464 is configured to always change to the main hold icon 463 when one variable display is digested and the data shift process is performed. For example, data. When the shift process is performed multiple times, it may change to the main hold icon 463, or it may change to the main hold icon 463 not only at the start timing of the variable display but also at the middle timing of the variable display. , The effect of changing to the hold icon 463 may be performed at the stage of being shifted to the execution area.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, and the like, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when starting the variation display, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4108) is on, each situation is based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or something. Further, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to "15RS" or "15RN" based on the information included in the opening command. If there is, set "15", and if it is "2RS", set "2".

After that, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the opening effect is set for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps), and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various production modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding production can be performed with reference to the table. You will have to select and execute it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a round command has been received in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, a maximum of 30 seconds is set for the effect during the round, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if there is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received in step S4709. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if there is a big hit with a ball in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit without a ball, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period (1 second) are set. Rather than setting the production separately, the setting is made so that the production (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and a setting is made to set the mode to the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, the hold icon 463 may be displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R may be held and stored). Pseudo-holding icon setting processing that controls the pseudo-holding icon 466 as a pseudo-winning mode and the pseudo-holding detection-corresponding display derived to perform the effect such as (may not be possible) is performed.

The pseudo hold icon 466 has the same aspect as the temporary hold icon 464 described above, and even if the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in the hold display area 462, it is the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 466. It is difficult to distinguish which of the icons 464 it is. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43A, a large number of pseudo-hold icons 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are attached to the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 in front of the pseudo-hold icon 464. The bubble display 467 is performed so that the bubbles continue to spring up. In the present embodiment, the bubble display 467 corresponds to the additional display.

Here, the pseudo hold icon setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the pseudo winning detection switch 445. If affirmative determination is made in step S4501, a pseudo lottery random number used for lottery in step S4502 as to whether or not to display the pseudo-hold icon 466 and whether or not to displace the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position. Acquires the value of the counter CG. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is configured as, for example, a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 29, the upper limit value (that is, 29) is reached, and then the lower limit value is returned to 0. There is. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is periodically updated, and the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is stored in the corresponding counter buffer each time. In step S4502, the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is acquired from the counter buffer.

In the following step S4503, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is any of "0 to 9". If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4503, it is determined in step S4504 whether or not the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is any of "10 to 19". If a negative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4505, the pseudo permission flag used for determining whether or not to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position (alone) is set to ON.

After step S4505 or when affirmative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4506, the value of the variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of variable information held in the reserved information storage area is "1". It is determined whether or not the above is less than "8" (whether or not it is "1 to 7"). If a negative determination is made in step S4506, that is, if no variable display is held, or if the variable display cannot be held any further, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4506, a pseudo hold icon display process for displaying the pseudo hold icon 466 is performed in step S4507. In the pseudo hold icon display process, the number of variable displays (variable information) currently held is confirmed by the value of the variable hold counter Nd, and the corresponding position in the hold display area 462 (the game ball is next). When detected by the second start winning switch 224b, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 461 indicating the hold of the corresponding variable display is displayed). After step S4507, in step S4508, the pseudo hold flag indicating that the pseudo hold icon 466 is being displayed is set to on, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4509 whether or not the pseudo hold flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4509, it is determined in step S4510 whether or not the variation pattern command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4510, the pseudo hold icon 466 is deleted in step S4511, and the pseudo hold flag is turned off in step S4512, and then this process ends. That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 is deleted when the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area (step S4203) is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4510, it is determined in step S4513 whether or not the starting command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4513, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4513, the pseudo hold icon 466 is deleted in step S4511, and the pseudo hold flag is turned off in step S4512, and then this process ends. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold display area 462 is switched and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (d), for example.

That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 of the present embodiment is immediately deleted when the variable display is newly held even in the stage before the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area is performed. Become. In this case, the hold icon 461 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466 in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, but when the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed as the hold icon 461, the hold icon 461 is displayed. , Since the mode is the same as that of the pseudo hold icon 466, the appearance does not change.

On the other hand, when the hold icon 463 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466 (when the display pattern of the hold icon 461 without a precursor is selected), the mode of the hold display area 462 is, for example, The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) is switched and displayed as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c). When the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the main hold icon 463, the same switching display mode is used.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, a pseudo blade opening control process for controlling the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 provided in the second start winning device 33b is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo blade opening control process will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the blade closing command (see step S2205 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 is received at the timing when the blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, the process of displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 to the standby position is performed in step S4602, and then this process is terminated. By performing this process, the pseudo blade member 431 controlled by the main control device 261 and controlled by the sub control device 262 is synchronized with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the open position to the closed position. It is designed to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position.

If a negative determination is made in step S4601, a blade opening command (step 26 in FIG. 26) is output from the main control device 261 at the timing when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position in step S4603. It is determined whether or not S2412 (see step S2217 of FIG. 27) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, the process of displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position is performed in step S4604, and then this process is terminated. By performing this process, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced from the standby position to the functional position in synchronization with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

If a negative determination is made in step S4603, has the open confirmation command output from the main control device 261 (see step S2307 in FIG. 25) been received at the timing of winning in the ball entry support lottery in step S4605? Determine if not. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4606, the independent operation invalid flag for prohibiting the pseudo-blade member 431 from operating independently is set to ON.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4605, at the timing when the opening / closing process of the series of second start winning devices 33b (blade member 37) performed by winning the ball entry support lottery in step S4607 is completed. It is determined whether or not the support period end command (see step S2211 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 has been received. If affirmative determination is made in step S4607, the single operation invalid flag is turned off in step S4608.

In step S4608, after step S4606, or when a negative determination is made in step S4607, the pseudo blade member 431 is in a state of being independently displaced to the functional position in step S4609 (the blade member 37 is in the closed position). It is determined whether or not the pseudo open flag indicating that there is) is set to ON.

If a negative determination is made in step S4609, the pseudo permission flag is set to be turned on with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected in step S4610. It is determined whether or not (see step S4505 in FIG. 40) is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4610, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4610, it is determined in step S4611 whether or not the independent operation invalid flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4611, it is determined in step S4612 whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is also made in step S4612, the pseudo open flag is set to ON in step S4613. In the subsequent step S4614, a value corresponding to the time for keeping the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position is set in the pseudo-opening timer used for opening / closing control of the pseudo-blade member 431. Further, in step S4615, a process of displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position is performed. After that, in step S4616, the pseudo permission flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4611 or step S4612, steps S4613 to S4615 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S4616. That is, when a series of open / close control for opening the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed, or during the jackpot state, the pseudo blade member 431 is independently operated by the pseudo blade open control process. It is configured so that no action is performed.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4609, it is determined in step S4617 whether or not the independent operation invalid flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4617, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo open timer is performed in step S4618.

In the following step S4619, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo release timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4619, that is, if the timing for displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 to the standby position has not yet arrived, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4619, the pseudo release flag is turned off in step S4620, the pseudo release timer is reset in step S4621, and the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the standby position in step S4622. After performing the process, this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4617, step S4618 and step S4619 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S4620. That is, in the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the pseudo blade is placed so as to cover the front of the moving blade member 37 and the blade member 37 displaced to the open position. The member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Further, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the functional position to the standby position by covering the front of the moving blade member 37. It is configured. Therefore, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, it is inconvenient if the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. Therefore, prior to the displacement of the blade member 37 to the open position, the timing (output from the main control device 261 when the ball entry support lottery is won) is determined to displace the blade member 37 to the open position. If the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position at the timing when the release confirmation command is received and the independent operation invalid flag is turned on), the process of returning the pseudo-blade member 431 to the standby position is performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3910, in the jackpot state with a ball ejection, the pseudo blade member 431 and the effect button 125 are used to perform a pseudo blade effect suggesting whether or not the player is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot. The feather effect processing is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo-blade effect processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been taught that the probability variation jackpot has been achieved. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4803, in step S4804, a large hit medium pseudo open lottery for whether or not the pseudo blade member 431 is set as the functional position is performed. Here, a corresponding random number counter and a table for storing the correspondence between the random number counter and the operation of the pseudo-blade member 431 are used. In the table, there are those that are referred to at the time of probable change jackpot and those that are referred to at the time of normal jackpot.

The table that is usually referred to at the time of a big hit has a small displacement pattern (for example, 35%) that displaces the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position side by about 40 degrees and a large displacement pattern (for example, 5%) that displaces the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position. ) And a pattern that does not displace (for example, 60%). On the other hand, the table referred to at the time of the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed to have a small displacement pattern (for example, 45%), a large displacement pattern (for example, 10%), a non-displacement pattern (for example, 40%), and a promotion effect to the probabilistic jackpot. It is set to be distributed to a pattern (for example, 5%).

Subsequently, in step S4805, a process corresponding to the result of the jackpot medium pseudo open lottery is executed. That is, when a small displacement pattern or a large displacement pattern is selected, the pseudo-blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side, and a process for returning to the standby position after a specified time is executed. Further, when the definite pattern is selected, the process for displacing the pseudo-blade member 431 to the functional position side and returning it to the standby position after a specified time, the process for starting the promotion effect, and the probable change jackpot. The process of memorizing that the state has already been taught (setting the corresponding flag to the default state) is executed. After that, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured so that the instruction about winning the probabilistic jackpot (15RS) with a ball is always given until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest. Has been done.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3912.

In step S3913, control settings and the like for a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined time elapses when the decorative symbol display device 42 is not variablely displayed; energy saving mode) and the like. Process.

In step S3914, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to S3914 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3915, and whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3916, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that the power cutoff occurrence information is stored, the power cutoff process is executed in step S3917. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized as the starting winning unit 401, and the starting winning unit 401 includes the first starting winning device 33a. A front decorative portion 403 that collectively covers the front of the second starting winning device 33b is provided. For this reason, the visibility of the game ball moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is relatively lowered, and as a result, the game ball becomes the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33a. It becomes difficult to understand which of the devices 33b the ball entered. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even in a low ball entry state, the second start winning device 33b is likely to be in a relatively open state, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is variablely displayed even though the game ball is being fired. If the player is configured to reduce the stress-prone time zone, such as when the game is not performed, the player only needs to allow the game ball to enter the back side of the front decoration unit 403. It is possible to advance the game with the feeling that the ball enters either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b and the winning or losing lottery is received. That is, even if the entry rate of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is low, if the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b relatively easily, the winning / failing lottery is constantly received. Therefore, there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. It does not matter whether or not the game ball is easy to enter the first start winning device 33a. As a result, even when the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression caused by that.

Further, as a matter of course, if the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the game ball cannot be entered into the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, the player who admits that the blade member 37 is in the closed position shifts his / her line of sight to the first start winning device 33a and observes whether or not the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. It tends to be.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the functional position is arranged in front of the blade member 37 and can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the open position, and the standby can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. When the pseudo-blade member 431 that can be displaced between the positions is provided, the blade member 37 is in the closed position, and the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position, the game ball passes through the game area behind the pseudo-blade member 431. It is configured to be possible.

That is, even if it is not the timing to open the second start winning device 33b (displace the blade member 37 to the open position), by displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position, the blade member 37 is as if it were. A pseudo-blade opening mode as if it exists in the open position is derived. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member 37 occurs from the visual mode in which the second start winning device 33b is closed. Therefore, if a player is interested in opening the second start winning device 33b, he / she recognizes that some action has occurred in the closed second start winning device 33b, and then the second start winning device 33b. It is also conceivable to turn the line of sight to the second start winning device 33b, thinking that the device 33b may have been opened. However, in reality, there is a case where the pseudo-blade opening mode (operation of only the pseudo-blade member 431) is performed, and the pseudo-blade opening mode is a mode as if the blade member 37 exists in the open position. Therefore, with respect to the second start winning device 33b, whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or the pseudo blade opening mode is derived only by glancing at it or entering the edge of the field of view. It is difficult to distinguish whether the blade member 37 is in the closed position, or it is misunderstood (for a moment) that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position.

As described above, the pseudo-blade opening mode is merely intended to make the blade member 37 appear to be opened, whereby the blade member 37 appears to be opened, but the second start winning device 33b The state of the game ball of the second start winning device 33b does not always match the appearance of the second start winning device 33b, such that there is no sign that the game ball has entered. Then, if the pseudo-blade opening mode is repeated to some extent and the game ball is constantly entering the second start winning device 33b or the like and there is no delay in the game (the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33a). Unless the player is forced to play a disadvantageous game due to the fact that the game ball does not enter the device 33b too much in total), it does not matter much whether the blade member 37 is opened or not. You can reach your heart. As a result, even when the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is reduced, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by that is more effective. It will be played more.

Further, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade opening mode. Therefore, there are an advanced player and a beginner player who can play a game such that the second start winning device 33b is opened and the game ball is fired only at the timing when the game ball can enter. It is possible to suppress the situation where the disparity is widened.

Further, by utilizing the pseudo-blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect related to the opening and closing of the blade member 37 and an effect as a mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade member 37. In addition, as the game progresses, the pseudo-blade opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, and it becomes an accent / liveliness or a rhythm (feels lonely when it disappears) in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, by deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode by using the pseudo-blade member 431, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be made more realistic. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member 37 behind the blade member 37, but in this case, the pseudo blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward. However, there is a concern that it will be difficult to see even if the pseudo-blade opening means is set to the pseudo-blade opening mode. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo-blade opening means in the pseudo-blade opening mode. As a result, it may be instantly grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, by providing the pseudo blade member 431 in front of the blade member 37, the above concerns can be dispelled.

Further, since the pseudo blade member 431 can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is simulated without inviting more game balls to enter the second start winning device 33b. The mode in which the blade member 431 operates (the mode in which the whale moves the forelimbs, the mode in which the second start winning device 33b opens and closes (subtly), etc.) can be fully utilized for staging and the like.

In particular, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to cover the front of the blade member 37 so as to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Has been done. Further, when the blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to cover the front of the blade member 37 so as to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position. Has been done. Therefore, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the blade member 37 is viewed from the front, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position but the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the pseudo blade member 431 is used. Can be the same as the front view (both have the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position visually). Further, since the blade member 37 in the middle of displacement is also covered with the pseudo blade member 431, it is difficult to understand that the blade member 37 has been displaced. Therefore, the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be further enhanced.

Further, by adopting a configuration in which the front surface side of the blade member 37 is not directly exposed to the front, it is not necessary to make the aspect of the front surface side of the blade member 37 the same as the embodiment of the pseudo blade member 431, and the front surface of the blade member 37 is not exposed. It is not necessary to perform any special processing such as drawing a figure (in this example, it is not necessary to make a shape that imitates the forelimb of a whale). Therefore, the configuration of the blade member 37 can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member 37, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member 431 to design the design. It is possible to prevent the sex from being deteriorated.

Further, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the pseudo blade member 431 is connected to the pseudo blade member 431 inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 connected to the blade member 37. 433 is inserted. As a result, the rotation axes of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be extended on the same straight line. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 can be synchronized relatively easily. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member 37 is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member 37, so that the front of the blade member 37 is further displaced. It can be surely covered. Therefore, the action and effect such as making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member 37 can be further exerted.

In addition, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the upper surface (guide surface) of the blade member 37 in the open position is located below the upper side of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member 37 (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member 37). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode is further achieved.

By providing the front decorative portion 403, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, if the game ball is launched aiming at the front decoration portion 403, the ball is entered into either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, which is a relatively easy-to-understand visual image. Can be done. Further, the front decoration portion 403 that collectively covers the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b can perform more dynamic decoration and the like, and can improve the design and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front decorative portion 403 includes a character display portion 441 in the shape of a whale excluding the forelimbs, and the pseudo-wing member 431 is formed to imitate the forelimbs of the whale. Then, the pseudo-blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position so that the whole image of the whale emerges. For this reason, the player is interested in the appearance of the game ball entering the starting prize devices 33a and 33b, while focusing the eyes on the whale mode in which the forelimbs move, while reducing the visibility of the back side of the front decorative portion 403. Can be reduced. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is further achieved.

Further, the front surface of the blade member 37 in the closed position is configured to be covered by the character display unit 441 of the front decorative unit 403. For this reason, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode is only derived, or whether the blade member 37 is also in the open position (whether the blade member 37 is in the closed position). By providing the pseudo-blade member 431 and deriving an effect that the second start winning device 33b may have been opened, the effect of the action is further exhibited.

Further, the tip of the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. This makes it easier to recognize that the pseudo-blade member 431 has been displaced to the functional position. Therefore, while hiding the operation of the blade member 37 as much as possible, by actively appealing the operation of the pseudo blade member 431, the start winning unit 401 can enjoy the change in the visual recognition mode, or the pseudo blade member can be enjoyed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the effect (pseudo-blade effect process, etc.) executed by using the operation of 431.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing control of the blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33b (starting winning device control process) is executed by the main control device 261 and the opening / closing control of the pseudo blade member 431 (pseudo blade opening control process). , Pseudo-blade effect processing) is configured to be executed by the sub-control device 262. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control device 261.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 261 has an open confirmation command (step) to the effect that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position prior to the process of displacing the blade member 37 to the open position (step S2410 or the like). S2307) is output to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is configured to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position when the open confirmation command is received (step S4604). Therefore, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is already in the functional position, so that the blade member 37 in the middle of displacement cannot be covered by the pseudo blade member 431. It is possible to avoid the situation where it ends up.

In addition, the pseudo-blade member 431 has a larger front area than the blade member 37, and when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position, the blade member 37 is in the closed position. The side portion of the pseudo-blade member 431 on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position side than the side surface. Further, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 on the functional position side is larger than the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. , Located on the open position side. That is, since the blade member 37 is controlled by the main control device 261 and the pseudo blade member 431 is controlled by the sub control device 262, the operation start timing of the blade member 37 and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member 431 are slightly different. There is a possibility of deviation. In this respect, by configuring the blade member 37 that can operate first so as to be excessively covered with the pseudo blade member 431, even if the blade member 37 is displaced slightly in advance, the pseudo blade member 431 can be used. It will fit within the covered area. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand whether or not the blade member 37 is displaced, and it is prevented that the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 are deviated from each other, resulting in deterioration of the design. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are detected, the corresponding hold lamps 46a or 46b are turned on and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The hold icon 461 is configured to be displayed in the hold display area 462 of 42. Therefore, even if the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are not directly visually recognized, by visually recognizing the hold icon 461 or the like, the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b can be played. It is possible to grasp (rather easy to grasp) that the ball has entered and the right to receive the winning / failing lottery has been obtained. Therefore, the chances of directly visually recognizing the starting winning devices 33a and 33b are reduced, and even if the ball entry rate to the first starting winning device 33a is relatively low, the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b can be entered. Unless the overall ball entry rate is low, put yourself in a situation where you do not care whether the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to avoid the situation (the eyes go to the first start winning device 33a). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which a game ball does not easily enter the first start winning device 33a, which causes a decrease in interest. On the other hand, even if it becomes a little difficult to see how the game ball enters the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b, the hold icon 461 etc. firmly indicates whether or not the game ball has entered. Since it can be confirmed that, it is possible to give a sense of security to the player.

Further, in the covered area (internal area of the starting winning unit 401) whose front is covered by the front decorative portion 403 of the game area, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covering area is provided. Has been done. In the present embodiment, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 is different from the hold icon 461 (book hold icon 463) that imitates the hold icon 461 (book hold icon 463). The pseudo hold icon 466 of the embodiment is configured to be derivable. Further, when the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the mode is the same as that of the pseudo hold icon 466 before deriving the hold icon 463 corresponding to the detection. The hold icon 464 is configured to be derived in some cases. Therefore, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, it is possible to perform an effect that the game ball that has entered the covering area (starting winning unit 401) may have entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of production opportunities and types of production, and to diversify the production. As a result, the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b) can be dramatically increased, and the interest can be improved.

Further, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are derived with a dynamic bubble display 467 that is displayed so as to be overlapped in front of the pseudo hold icon 466 and is displayed as if the main hold icon 463 is blurred. Therefore, it can be surely grasped that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not the present hold icon 463. Therefore, for example, if the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 and the present hold icon 463 are different from each other, but they have the same mode or are indistinguishable from each other, the game is played. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a person thinks that the pseudo hold icon 466 is the main hold icon 463 and causes distrust or the like.

Since the mode of the hold icon 463 is determined based on the content of the corresponding variable display, the mode of the hold icon 463 can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in the effect of whether or not the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 become the main hold icon 463.

In addition, the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262. Therefore, by reducing the number of information input to the main control device 261 and the number of configurations for inputting information to the main control device 261 as much as possible, the control load of the main control device 261 can be reduced and the main control device 261 can be reached. It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected, the holding of the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is less than eight. That is, unless the detection by the start winning switch 224a and 224b is valid as a trigger for the winning / failing lottery, the pseudo holding icon 466 corresponding to the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is not newly displayed (step). See S4506). Therefore, in a state where the temporary hold icon 464 and the main hold icon 463 are not supposed to be displayed, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, so that the pseudo hold icon 466 is clearly recognized. It can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pseudo-holding icon 466 is unnecessarily derived, resulting in a decrease in interest.

Further, in the covered area of the game area whose front is covered by the front decorative portion 403, a guide stand that guides the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 at a position downstream of the second start winning device 33b. 446 is provided. Further, at a position adjacent to the lower side of the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position, a guide nail 448 that changes the traveling direction of the game ball (in this example, guides toward the guide base 446) is provided.

For example, if the game ball enters the covering area and the blade member 37 is in the open position, the game ball reaches the guide point guided by the blade member 37 to the ball receiving portion 405 of the second start winning device 33b. However, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area as it is without being guided by the blade member 37, and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game ball is discharged from the covered area extend in a substantially straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area earlier wins the first start. Without entering the device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, it is immediately grasped as being discharged from the covering area.

In this regard, as described above, the provision of the guide base 446 and the guide nail 448 causes the traveling direction of the game ball to change in the covered area and the traveling speed of the game ball to be delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to a place that is easily visible to the outside, and the game ball is the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning prize. It is possible to create more situations in which the ball may or may not have entered the device 33b.

In particular, by visually recognizing the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, and it is held. Since various effects related to the above are performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is held rather than directly visually recognizing the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b to confirm whether or not the game ball has entered. It is possible to facilitate the transition to a game playability such that the icon 461 confirms that the ball has entered the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the production or accumulating stress by visually recognizing how the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning device 33a.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A; Shape, design, etc. of the front decorative portion) In the above embodiment, the front decorative portion 403 is configured in a substantially disk shape, but the shape, design, etc. of the front decorative portion 403 are for each model of the pachinko machine 10. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, the portion that covers the first start winning device 33a and the portion that covers the second start winning device 33b may be configured to be configured as separate bodies (the parts that were separate may be combined). However, the ones composed of separate bodies may be arranged adjacent to each other). Further, for example, a "rock reef" may be drawn on the front decorative portion 403, and a "fish school" may be drawn on the pseudo feather member 431. It should be noted that the design of the front decorative portion 403 and the design of the pseudo-blade member 431 may be configured so as not to be related at all.

Further, for example, the front decoration unit 403 may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning / failing lottery, etc.). In addition, the front decoration portion 403 is instructed that the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b exist, and the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided. It is also possible to provide a display that teaches the position of the game ball or that the position where the game ball is aimed is here. That is, since the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized and become a little difficult to understand, there is a concern that the player may be confused as to where to launch the game ball. By displaying, such concerns can be suppressed. Further, if it is difficult to understand only by the display guidance in the front decoration unit 403, the guidance display is also performed in other parts (for example, the display in which the normal screen is not changed from the demo display screen in the decoration symbol display device 42). In the case of switching to, the display screen may be configured to guide the target position of the game ball, etc.). In addition, in the above embodiment, the front decorative portion 403 is configured to have transparency by forming the front decorative portion 403 with a transparent or translucent resin, but for example, with respect to the front decorative portion 403. It may be configured to have transparency by forming a plurality of slits and holes.

Further, in the front decoration unit 403 (character display unit 441), an index unit is provided so as to be a standard for determining whether the distance between the nails of the life nails 406 provided in pairs on the left and right is wide or narrow. It may be configured. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, of the whale which is the character display unit 441, the two divided tips of the tail 701 located near the life nail 406 are sharpened, and the tips are each pair of life nails. It may be configured to be arranged directly under the 406. In this case, the portion of the tail 701 of the whale whose distance between the tips is substantially the same as the distance between the life nails 406 constitutes the index portion.

In this case, by comparing the pair of left and right life nails 406 with the whale tail 701, it is possible to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails 406 is wide or narrow. .. Therefore, the proper position of the life nail 406 (head) can be instantly grasped, and it can be relatively determined whether or not maintenance is required for the life nail 406. When the distance between the life nails 406 is narrower than that of the whale's tail 701, it is possible to avoid the game so as not to be disadvantageous to itself. As a result, the distance between the life nails 406 can be made as constant as possible, and the variation in the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a can be reduced for each pachinko machine 10. .. In particular, since the index portion (whale tail 701) is provided in the front decorative portion 403, it is close to the tip portion (head) of the life nail 406, whereby the inclination of the life nail 406 can be grasped more reliably. can do.

The mode of the index unit is not particularly limited, and for example, an index unit having the same width as between the pair of life nails 406 may be provided immediately below the pair of life nails 406, and each life may be provided. An index unit may be provided just below the nail 406 so as to indicate the position of each game nail 406, or the index unit is not formed by the character display unit 441 or the like, but is indexed by the shape of the front decorative unit 403. It may form a part. Further, the index portion may be provided on the pseudo blade member 431 or the blade member 37.

The shape of the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the slider 411 may be omitted. Further, the ball receiving portion 405 can be configured as a separate body from the front decorative portion 403.

(B; Target covered by the front decorative portion) In the above embodiment, the front decorative portion 403 is configured to collectively cover the front of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, but either one of them. It may be configured to cover the front of the chisel, or it may be configured to cover other winning devices (variable winning device 32) and the like. In the above embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are arranged vertically, but the arrangement is not particularly limited, and the arrangement is configured to be arranged, for example, to the left and right. You may. Further, in the above embodiment, the first start winning device 33a is configured so that the game ball can always enter, and the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which the game ball can enter and cannot enter. It is configured to change state to the closed state, but for example, both may be one in which the game ball can always enter, or both may be changed to the open state and the closed state.

Further, the front decorative portion 403 may be configured to cover the front and the upper side of the pair of left and right life nails 406. In this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a is based on various matters (display of the hold icon 461, etc.) derived as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. You can ask them to go. As a result, it is possible to further promote a game that is not so particular about the pace at which the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. When adopting this configuration, in order to avoid interference between the life nail 406 and the front decorative portion 403, the protrusion length of the life nail 406 from the front surface of the game board 30 is shortened, or the front decorative portion 403 is used. On the other hand, a nail hole for inserting the life nail 406 may be formed.

(C; Operation of the pseudo blade member, etc.) In the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the middle of the open position or displacement, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to cover the front thereof, for example. The blade member 37 may be in the open position, while the pseudo blade member 431 may be in the standby position.

Further, the effect using the pseudo-blade member 431 and the trigger for operating the pseudo-blade member 431 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42, a display indicating that the effect button 125 should be operated at the timing of whether or not a reach state occurs is derived, and the effect button 125 is operated. , The pseudo-blade member 431 operates according to the content of the variation display (for example, when the effect button 125 is operated, the pseudo-blade member 431 operates small each time, but how much The pseudo-blade member 431 is configured so as not to reach the functional position even if it is operated, and when the state shifts to the reach state, the pseudo-blade member 431 is operated once or a predetermined number of times based on the operation of the effect button 125. The member 431 may be configured to be displaced to the functional position). However, the blade member 37 does not operate in association with the effect using the pseudo blade member 431, and is maintained in the closed position unless the ball entry support lottery is won.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the configuration for operating the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 of the second start winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are operated by a motor, but another driving means such as a solenoid may be used to operate the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431. Further, in the above embodiment, the motor is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade member 431. For example, the pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are provided by one driving means. May be configured to be operational. When the pseudo-side motor 432 is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the pseudo-blade member 431 as in the above embodiment, only one of the pair of pseudo-blade members 431 is used in the production using the pseudo-blade member 431. It is also possible to move it or make it move separately on the left and right.

Further, the area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 is larger than the area of the front surface of the blade member 37, but the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to substantially cover the front surface of the blade member 37. For example, they may be configured to have substantially the same area (same shape when viewed from the front). When the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is above (standby position side / closed position side) from the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment, the main Even if the blade member 37 controlled by the control device 261 starts to be displaced toward the closed position prior to the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 is exposed to the area where the front is not covered by the pseudo blade member 431. In addition to being able to prevent such a situation, the start winning unit 401 is generally seen by a player whose line of sight is above the position where the start winning unit 401 is provided (looking from above). In such a case, the blade member 37 can be hidden by the pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible.

In the above embodiment, a predetermined panel may be interposed between the pseudo blade member 431 and the blade member 37, or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided in front of the front decorative portion 403. In this case, the game ball collides with the step (upper side portion of the pseudo-blade member 431) formed between the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403 and the pseudo-blade member 431 as the functional position, and is thrown away. You can avoid the situation.

(D; Material of Pseudo-Blade Member) Further, in the above embodiment, the wing member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. It may be configured to have the same aspect as the front surface of the 431 (corresponding to the above embodiment, the visual aspect imitating the forelimbs of a whale). In this case, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the picture of the whale is completed and the blade member 37 is in the open position even if the pseudo blade member 431 is not displaced to the functional position. The mode of the start winning unit 401 when the 431 is in the standby position and the mode of the start winning unit 401 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position may be substantially the same. can.

However, when such a configuration is adopted, the front and rear positions of the front surface of the blade member 37 and the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are displaced even if the front view shape is the same. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced to the functional position, so that the blade member 37 is not in the open position. However, both of the front-viewing modes can be the front surface of the same pseudo-blade member 431, and the pseudo-blade opening mode can be made more realistic. For example, by making the color of the blade member 37 the same as the color of the base plate 402, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the location of the blade member 37 as much as possible.

(E; Shape of pseudo-blade member, etc.) In the above embodiment, the tip of the pseudo-blade member 431 at the functional position is configured to be located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, but outside. It may be configured to fit on the inner peripheral side of the peripheral edge. In particular, when the tip edge of the pseudo-blade member 431 is displaced along the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, the design can be improved. Even when the tip of the pseudo-blade member 431 is configured to fit on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, the pseudo-blade displaced to the functional position as in the above embodiment. The member 431 is configured to protrude to the rear position of the general portion 442, which has higher transparency than the character display portion 441, in the front decorative portion 403, so that, for example, the character display portion 441 and the like are relatively transparent. It is possible to make it easier to confirm the pseudo-blade member 431 displaced to the functional position as compared with the case where the displacement is performed only behind the low portion. Further, the three-dimensional shape of the pseudo blade member 431 is not limited to a plate shape, for example, a substantially square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member 431 and can accommodate the blade member 37 inside. It may be configured in a substantially U-shaped cross section such that a part of the square frame is cut out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, a pressing recess 711 that opens forward and downward on the lower front side of the blade member 37 is provided, and pressing that can be inserted into the pressing recess 711 on the rear surface side of the pseudo blade member 431. The convex portion 712 may be provided. In this case, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the blade member 37 is mainly driven (the blade side motor 421 first or only the blade side motor 421) to drive (pseudo blades). Even if the operation of the member 431 is slightly delayed), the pseudo-blade member 431 is pressed by the blade member 37 and is displaced from the standby position to the functional position.

On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is mainly driven (the pseudo side motor 432 first or only the pseudo side motor 432) to drive (the blade member). The blade member 37 is pressed by the pseudo-blade member 431 and displaced from the open position to the closed position (even if the operation of 37 is slightly delayed). As described above, by providing the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712, it is possible to prevent the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 from operating separately, and the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be separated from each other. , It can be synchronized and moved as if it were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position deviate from each other, and the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member 431 is present. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether the displacement is merely a functional position.

Further, in the pseudo-blade member 431 of FIG. 48, by arranging the pressing convex portion 712 on the axial center side of the pseudo-blade member 431 as much as possible, when the pseudo-blade member 431 is independently displaced to the functional position, a game is played. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being irregularly flipped or damaged by the pressing convex portion 712 due to the ball colliding with the pressing convex portion 712. However, the forming position of the pressing convex portion 712 is not particularly limited, and for example, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is driven to push the blade member 37 in the open position to displace it to the closed position. By arranging the pressing convex portion 712 as far as possible from the axis of the pseudo blade member 431, the force required to push the blade member 37 in the open position and displace it to the closed position can be minimized. can.

Even when the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712 are provided, only the pseudo blade member 431 is placed on the functional position side while the blade member 37 is in the closed position from the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position. It can be displaced. Further, by providing the pressing convex portion 712 on the rotation axis side of the pseudo-blade member 431 as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game ball moving behind the semi-transparent pseudo-blade member 431 as much as possible. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper surface of the pressing concave portion 711 constitutes a blade-side pressing portion, and the pressing convex portion 712 constitutes a pseudo-side pressing portion.

In the above embodiment, the blade member 37 is configured to fit on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, but at least the tip portion of the blade member 37 in the open position is the front decorative portion. It may be configured to be located outside the outer peripheral edge of the 403. Further, in the above embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to cover the front of the entire blade member 37, but for example, the tip portion of the blade member 37 is ahead of the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431. A configuration that cannot be partially covered, such as protruding in the (centrifugal direction of the rotating shaft), may be adopted. That is, for example, the tip portion of the blade member 37 in the open position protrudes toward the outer peripheral side from the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, and protrudes from the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. When adopted, the tip end portion of the blade member 37 is exposed forward, and it becomes easy to confirm that the blade member 37 is in the open position.

(F; Configuration in which the pseudo-blade member is omitted) In the above embodiment, the pseudo-blade member 431 that can cover the front of the vane member 37 is provided, but the pseudo-blade member 431 can also be omitted. Further, in the case of omitting the pseudo blade member 431, in order to make it difficult to understand whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or the closed position, in the front decorative portion 403, the front of the blade member 37 in the open position. Corresponding to the position, the character display unit 441 is configured so that the forelimbs of the whale are also drawn, and the display (semi-transparent) of the forelimbs of the whale covers the front of the blade member 37 in the open position. It may be configured.

The blade member 37 in the closed position may be configured so that the front surface thereof is covered with a whale body or the like, as in the above embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, the display of the forelimbs of the whale constitutes the opening covering means (open covering portion), and the display of the whale body constitutes the closing covering means (closed covering portion). Incidentally, in the above embodiment, the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position constitutes the open-time covering means, and the display of the whale body (and the pseudo-blade member 431 in the standby position) constitutes the closed-time covering means.

(G; Modification example of pseudo-blade opening mode) Further, instead of or in addition to the pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 by the pseudo-blade member 431 exists in the open position, another pseudo-blade opening is performed. Another pseudo-blade opening means capable of deriving the embodiment may be provided.

(G-1; light guide plate) For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the front decorative portion 403, by incident light from the side, an embodiment imitating a whale's forelimb emerges in the portion where the light is incident. It may be configured as follows. More specifically, it is incident on the front decorative portion 403 from the side with respect to the range surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50 (a) (hereinafter referred to as “light emitting portion 721”) in the front decorative portion 403. Processing is performed so that the reflection angle of the light is different from that of other parts (a light guide plate that does not totally reflect inside the front decorative portion 403 and is irradiated forward). In this embodiment, the light emitting unit 721 constitutes a pseudo open object.

Further, light is incident on the light emitting portion 721 from a portion corresponding to the base of the front leg of the whale. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, a cylindrical shaft support portion 724 protruding from the front surface of the blade member 722 is provided corresponding to the front of the portion of the blade member 722 connected to the blade shaft 723. The shaft support portion 724 is inserted into a bearing portion 438 (see FIG. 45 (b)) formed in a circular concave shape at a position corresponding to the base of the front leg of the whale on the rear surface side of the front decorative portion 403 and is pivotally supported. ..

The blade shaft 723 has a cylindrical shape, and a core rod 726 provided with a pseudo light source 725 is inserted through a part of the outer peripheral surface of the front end portion of the blade shaft 723. The core rod 726 also has a cylindrical shape, and a wiring for a pseudo light source 725 is inserted inside the core rod 726. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the core rod 726 is configured to protrude forward from the blade shaft 723 and to be housed inside the shaft support portion 724 of the blade member 722. That is, the pseudo light source 725 is located on the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 438 of the front decorative portion 403.

Further, the core rod 726 is also provided with a gear 727 connected to a motor (not shown) and is configured to be rotatable. In this embodiment, the core rod 726 is at a position where the simulated light source 725 faces the light emitting portion 721 (see FIG. 50 (b)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 in the open position in the front view. In front view, the position where the simulated light source 725 faces the light emitting unit 721 (see FIG. 50 (c)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 at the intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. It is configured so that it can be displaced between them. In the state of FIG. 50A, the pseudo light source 725 is turned off.

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the above embodiment, when the same condition as the condition for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 alone to the functional position is satisfied), the blade member 722 that opens and closes is imitated. As shown in FIG. 50 (c), the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the middle of opening is made to emit light, and then as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the open position is emitted. After a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the process of closing is made to emit light, and then the pseudo light source 725 is turned off.

Even when the above configuration is adopted, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived. Further, since the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the front decorative portion 403, for example, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be seen as compared with the case where the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived at a position behind the blade member 722. Ease can be improved.

When the blade member 722 operates, the light emitting unit 721 may also be configured to emit light by synchronizing as much as possible. In this case, the mode in which the blade member 722 is displaced to the open position and the mode in which the pseudo blade is opened can be brought as close as possible. Further, instead of rotating the pseudo light source 725, a plurality of pseudo light sources capable of causing each light emitting unit 721 to emit light may be provided.

(G-2; transmission hole) Further, for example, in the base plate 402 for attaching the start winning unit 401 to the game board 30, by incident light from the rear, the blade member 37 is imitated at the portion where the light is incident. It may be configured so that the above-mentioned aspect emerges. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c), the main body portion of the blade member 731 is made of an opaque resin, and a rectangular opening is formed on the front surface side. The prism plate 732 is fitted there. Further, a light source is built in the blade member 731.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), of the base plate 734, the portion where the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open position is located in the front view, and the intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. Corresponding to the portion where the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 is located, a transmission hole having the same shape as the prism plate 732 is formed, and the pseudo prism plate 735 is fitted therein. Further, behind each pseudo prism plate 735, a pseudo light source for causing each pseudo prism plate 735 to emit light is installed. In this embodiment, the light emitting prism plate 732 constitutes the light emitting means, and the pseudo prism plate 735 constitutes the pseudo open object.

In this embodiment, when the blade member 731 is located at a position other than the closed position, the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 emits light. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the above embodiment, when the same condition as the condition for independently shifting the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position is satisfied), the blade member 731 that opens and closes is imitated. After the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 being opened is made to emit light, the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open position is made to emit light for a predetermined time. After that, the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 being closed is made to emit light, and then the pseudo light source is turned off.

Even when the above configuration is adopted, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived. Further, behind the blade member 731 (base plate 734), a pseudo blade opening mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration. Further, in this embodiment, the prism plate 732 capable of deriving the light emitting mode in the blade member 731 is provided, and the pseudo blade opening mode imitates the light emitting mode of the prism plate 732. In this way, by making the blade member 731 a visible mode in which the blade member 731 emits light by itself, the mode in which the blade member 731 is set to the open position and the pseudo blade opening mode using the pseudo prism plate 735 can be obtained. It can be tied more strongly (it can be confused with an intuitive judgment at a glance). Further, it is possible to simplify the configuration (shape) for deriving the pseudo blade opening mode (sufficiently pseudo mode can be obtained by imitating only the prism plate 732 instead of the entire blade member 731).

The timing of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be derived periodically (for example, almost always). Further, for example, as the opening pattern of the second start winning device 33b, a short opening having a short opening time and a long opening having a long opening time are set, and in the case of a short opening, a pseudo opening is set. Derivation of the blade opening mode makes it relatively difficult to understand the operation of the blade member 37, and in the case of long opening, derivation of the pseudo blade opening mode is prohibited so that the operation of the blade member 37 is relatively easy to understand. It may be configured. However, as in the above embodiment, in a configuration in which the operation of the pseudo-blade member 431 is easier to understand when the pseudo-blade member 431 is operated together with the blade member 37, the pseudo-blade member 431 is used as in the pseudo-blade opening mode. It will be operated together with the blade member 37. In addition, it may be difficult to understand the long opening.

(H; Movable Covering Means) In the above embodiment, a movable covering accessory (movable covering means) having transparency such as the pseudo-blade member 431 is provided so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. However, the movable covering accessory guides the game ball to the peripheral portion of the predetermined winning device, particularly near the winning opening (moving game ball) or to the predetermined winning device (slider of the above embodiment). Such as 411, a game nail, etc. The blade member 37 of the above embodiment is configured to cover the front of the peripheral portion (moving game ball) of the guide means). May be good. Further, the movable covering accessory may be configured to be displaceable between a functional position that covers the front of the covering target and a standby position that exposes the covering target to the front.

In this case, when the movable covering accessory is in the functional position, how the game ball is covered by the movable covering accessory, even though the movable covering means has fluoroscopy. Whether it was involved, that is, whether or not the game ball entered when the start winning devices 33a and 33b were covered, or when the guide means was covered, the game ball was provided by the guide means. Visibility is relatively reduced as to whether or not the guide has been guided. In particular, when the movable covering accessory is in operation or immediately after the operation, the player's line of sight is swayed toward the movable covering accessory, and this tendency becomes stronger. Therefore, there may be a situation in which the player loses sight of the game ball for a moment even if he / she is chasing the game ball with his / her eyes, or the player may grasp the movement of the game ball by another method (for example, display of the hold icon 461 on the decorative symbol display device 42). It is thought that it will be easier to make it, and you will have the opportunity to add a new effect (pseudo hold icon 466, etc.) to it. As a result, it is possible to generate more dramatic developments and effects regarding the entry of the game ball into the start winning devices 33a and 33b (starting winning), and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, as in the above embodiment, a game of moving a game area such as a guide nail 448 to a position directly under the movable covering accessory (pseudo-blade member 431) at the functional position. It is desirable to provide a course changing means for changing the traveling direction of the ball.

When such a configuration is adopted, the game ball that has entered the area (specific covering area) covered by the movable covering accessory (pseudo-blade member 431) at the functional position and the outside can be easily visually recognized from the specific covering area. It may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the game ball that has jumped out to the place, and the game ball may have entered the start winning device (second start winning device 33b) or been guided by the guiding means (blade member 37). You can create more situations where you may or may not. Thereby, in the case of performing an effect of teaching / suggesting what happened to the game ball that has entered the specific covering area, such an effect can be made more effective.

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the region covered with the movable covering accessory at the functional position (specific covering region), the guide nail 448 is provided by increasing the amount of driving into the game board 30. It may be configured to be arranged. In addition, a game ball guided by the guiding means (for example, a game ball that moves on the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment) or a game after being guided by the guiding means. The front of at least a portion (better overall) of the ball (eg, a game ball that hits and bounces off the top of the guide nail 448) is configured to be covered with a movable covering accessory in a functional position. Is desirable.

Further, when the target covered with the movable covering accessory at the functional position is the guiding means, the front of the peripheral portion of the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) to which the game ball is guided by the guiding means. It is desirable to provide a pre-decorative portion 403 (general portion of the pre-covering means) that covers the surface. Further, it is desirable that the front decorative portion 403 and the movable covering accessory (pseudo-blade member 431) at the functional position are partially continuous or close to each other when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the game ball guided by the guide means whose front is covered with the movable covering accessory and the game ball whose course is changed by the course changing means are the movable covering accessory in the functional position, and the front is It is configured so that it can be moved to the area covered in front by the front decorative portion 403 (general covering area) without being (almost) exposed to the uncovered area (the exposure time during movement is as short as possible). Is desirable.

By providing a course changing means (for example, a guide stand 446) also in the area covered in front by the front decorative portion 403 (general covering area), the behavior of the game ball in the general covering area and the specific covering area can be better grasped. It becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game balls that have entered these covered areas and the game balls that have been discharged from the covered areas. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game ball that has entered the covered area may or may not have entered the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b). Further, by providing the pseudo winning detection switch 445 in the area covered in front by the front decorative portion 403 (general covering area), it is possible to improve the playability and the directing property.

(I; Aspect of pseudo-hold icon)
(I-1) In the above embodiment, the modes of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, based on the detection of the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 or the second start winning-winning switch 224b, the floating ring-shaped pseudo-holding icon 466 or the temporary holding icon 464 is a decorative symbol display device. At 42, a display that appears at a position to the right of the hold display area 462 and moves (rolls) toward the hold display area 462 on the left is started. Then, in the case of the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, the temporary hold icon 464 reaches the specified position of the hold display area 462 and stops, so that the display mode is switched to the main hold icon 463, and the pseudo winning detection is detected. In the case of the detection of the switch 445, the pseudo hold icon 466 does not stop even if it reaches the specified position of the hold display area 462, and the display is performed so as to disappear from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 as it is. It may be configured as follows.

The hold icon 463 may also have a predetermined movement. For example, the character constituting the hold icon 463 may be configured to perform an operation such as waving a hand or changing a facial expression so as not to get out of the hold display area 462. In addition, when the pseudo hold icon 466 itself is operating, the temporary hold icon 464 is switched to the main hold icon 463 by displaying the main hold icon 463 so that the movement is connected. It can be easily recognized by the player. However, when differentiating the temporary hold icon 464 and the pseudo hold icon 466 from the main hold icon 463 only by the magnitude of the operation, there is a concern that the difference may be difficult to understand depending on the degree. , Shape, pattern, hue, etc. should be changed to differentiate.

From the viewpoint of enjoying the effect of whether or not the start prize has been performed using the pseudo prize detection switch 445, at least one start prize device (second) in the game area covered in front by the front decoration portion 403. It suffices if the start winning device 33b) and the pseudo winning detection switch 445 exist, and other configurations arranged in such an area, a configuration in which the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) can be opened and closed, etc. Can be omitted.

(I-2) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, a snowman 751 is adopted as the hold icon, and the hold display area 462 is based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 or the second start prize switch 224b. Along with the start of the display of snow falling from above, a pseudo hold icon or a snowman 752 being created as a temporary hold icon is displayed at a predetermined position in the hold display area 462, and it is gradually completed. It may be configured.

Further, for example, the motif of the hold icon 461 set for each model as an additional display displayed in front of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 together with the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464. It can be changed as appropriate according to the situation. For example, an additional display such as a stage curtain, or an additional display during work (for example, a work scaffold is installed around the pseudo hold icon 466 and a worker is working) is performed. It may be that. It is also possible to omit the additional display such as the bubble display 467.

By adopting these configurations, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 has not been determined, and by extension, there is a strong impression that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 may be further changed. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles caused by misunderstanding the pseudo-hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 as the main hold icon 463 (such as the variable display does not start even though there is a hold, or the hold disappears). can do.

(J; winning history) Further, for example, the detection history of the first start winning switch 224a (time for each detection), the detection history of the second starting winning detection switch (time for each detection), and the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch. A detection history storage means capable of storing the history (time of each detection) may be provided so that the storage information of the detection history storage means can be output. For example, the detection history storage means is provided in the sub control device 262 or a control device electrically connected to the sub control device 262, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a person involved in the hall, the sub control device 262 is performed. May read out the stored information of the detection history storage means and configure it so that it can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, the hall computer of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed may be configured to output the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means.

In this case, for example, in the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to the player misunderstanding the pseudo hold icon 466 as the main hold icon 463, data for explaining the circumstances or the like can be surely obtained, and the trouble is twisted. It is possible to avoid the situation where the data is lost.

(K; Erase of Pseudo-Holding Icon) The conditions for erasing the pseudo-holding icon 466 in the above embodiment are not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected while the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, the pseudo hold icon 466 is replaced with a temporary hold icon 466. Although the hold icon 464 or the main hold icon 463 is configured to be displayed, even if the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected (adding the number of pseudo hold icons 466). However, the pseudo hold icon 466 may be continuously displayed (if the hold limit is not reached).

Further, the pseudo hold icon 466 is configured to be displayed even when no variable display is held, or the pseudo hold icon 466 is not deleted even if the hold shift process is performed only once. You may do it. In this case, there is a possibility that only the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed in the hold display area 462. Therefore, in response to this, at the timing when the corresponding variable display is started with the temporary hold icon 464 remaining. It is configured so that it may reach. Further, an effect when the start timing of the variable display is reached with the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 (for example, when the bubble display 467 becomes large and then disappears, is the hold icon 461 remaining? It is desirable to perform an effect (such as whether or not the hold icon 463 is displayed).

Further, the number obtained by adding the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463, temporary hold icon 464) displayed at one time in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo hold icon 466 is the hold upper limit of the variable display. The number may exceed (8 in the above embodiment). In addition, based on the predetermined operation of the player, the pseudo hold icon 466 is erased, the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the main hold icon 463, such a change is promoted, or an effect accompanied by such a change is derived. It may be configured to be done.

(L; Hold icon) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is the variable display based on the ball. However, for example, the hold icon 461 may or may not have information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display (predetermined). The mode is derived when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as winning a lottery, or when a predetermined input operation of a player is performed, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied while such an input operation is performed. It may be configured to be).

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display a maximum of eight hold icons 461, but for example, a total of five or more variable displays of the special display devices 43L and 43R are held. Even if it is, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that only four hold icons 461 are displayed at the maximum. Further, for example, when the hold icon 461 can be displayed by the same number as the upper limit of the hold number of the variable display (8 in the above example), or when the pseudo hold icon 466 is included, a larger number can be displayed. In this case, in order to reduce the display space of the hold icon 461 (hold display area 462), for example, the four hold icons 461 that are digested first are displayed larger than the hold icons 461 that are digested later. It may be configured as. Further, the mode of the hold icon 461 to be digested later may be configured to be simplified to the extent that the number of holds can be grasped.

(M; Pseudo winning detection switch) In the above embodiment, the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is provided on the downstream side of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, but the first starting winning device 33a and It may be provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b, or may be provided on the downstream side of one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b and on the upstream side of the other. Further, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is on the upstream side of the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the game ball detected by the pseudo winning detecting switch 445 is the first starting winning device 33a or the first starting winning device 33a. 2 The start winning device 33b may be configured to allow the ball to enter, or the game ball that has passed through the pseudo winning detection switch 445 may enter the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. A game ball that is guided to a place where the ball does not enter, is installed in the winning opening or the out opening provided with the pseudo winning detection switch 445 in the covering area, or enters the winning opening or the out opening. It may be configured to also serve as a detection switch for detection, etc.). In particular, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is installed in the winning opening provided in the covering area or the out opening, the game ball that has entered the starting winning unit 401 wins the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It becomes more difficult to understand whether or not it is.

(N; Movable front decorative portion) In the above embodiment, the front decorative portion 403 is provided so as not to be relatively displaceable with respect to the game board 30, but it may be provided so as to be relatively displaceable. For example, as shown in FIG. 52, a rotating shaft 762 may be attached to the rear surface side of the front decorative portion 761, and the rotating shaft 762 may be configured to be rotatable by a motor 763 as a decorative driving means. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to be driven based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b.

In this case, since it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b by the operation of the front decoration portion 761, the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33a can be detected. It is possible to proceed with the game with a relative sense of security without confirming that the game ball directly enters the device 33b. As a result, attention can be paid to the effect of teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery.

Further, for example, in the detection of either the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the front decorative portion 761 may be configured to be displaceable in the same manner. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to be able to be driven even when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected and the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed. In this case, depending on the operation mode of the front decoration unit 761, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo hold icon 466 is immediately grasped as not the temporary hold icon 464 (main hold icon 463).

Further, the rotary shaft 762 of FIG. 52 has a portion attached to the front decorative portion 761 and a portion to which a gear 766 meshed with the pinion 765 attached to the drive shaft 764 of the motor 763 is attached as elastic means. It is connected by a coil spring 767. Therefore, the front decorative portion 761 is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball with the front decorative portion 761 even in the non-driving state of the motor 763.

Therefore, it is possible to add fun to the operation of the front decorative portion 761. Further, since the front decorative portion 761 is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front decorative portion 761, the game ball may almost always enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b for a beginner player. You can have a sense of expectation.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the front decorative portion 761 is displaceable by the motor 763 and is displaceable by the collision of the game ball without driving the motor 763 is not particularly limited. For example, in the non-driving state of the motor 763, the link mechanism (pinion 765 and the gear 766) that interlocks the motor 763 and the front decoration portion 761 is not meshed, and in the non-driving state of the motor 763, the front decoration is set. The portion 761 may be configured to be supported by an elastic body. In order to reduce the load on the coil spring 767, for example, it is desirable to provide a portion of the rotating shaft 762 that is attached to the front decorative portion 761 and a bearing portion that supports the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 761.

Further, for example, the panel is installed so as to be in contact with or close to the rear surface of the front decorative portion 761 so that the operation of the front decorative portion 761 does not affect other configurations (bearing portion 438 on the panel). Etc.) is desirable. Furthermore, a plurality of front decoration parts are provided so as to be stacked so that different operations can be performed (for example, different pictures are drawn for each front decoration part and the relative position changes, so that the front decoration part can be performed from the front. It may be configured so that the visible pattern also changes). For example, when there is a front decorative portion that always operates, the behavior of the game ball moving behind it becomes more difficult to see. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest and teach predetermined information by combining the positions of a plurality of front decoration portions.

(O; winning sound effect) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, the first winning sound effect corresponding to the detection of the first starting winning switch 224a and the first winning sound effect corresponding to the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b. The 2 winning sound effect and the 1st winning sound effect and the confusion winning sound effect close to the 2nd winning sound effect are configured to be able to be generated, and the 2nd winning sound effect or the 2nd winning sound effect is based on the detection of the 2nd starting winning switch 224b. It may be configured to generate a confused winning sound effect and to generate a confused winning sound effect based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 (when it leads to the display of the pseudo holding icon 466). The functions of the sub control device 262 and the like that generate these sound effects constitute the sound effect generating means.

In this case, even if the start winning devices 33a and 33b are not directly visually recognized, the sound effect can be used to confirm that the game ball has entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b, so that the game can proceed more smoothly. Can be done. Further, by configuring the confused winning sound effect to be generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, even if the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed, the sound effect is not accompanied, so that the temporary holding icon 464 (main holding) is displayed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is immediately determined that the icon is not 463).

Further, the confused winning sound effect may be derived even when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. Therefore, due to the difference in the sound effect, even if the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, the sound effect is not accompanied, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately determined that the pseudo hold icon 464 is not the temporary hold icon 464 (main hold icon 463). be able to. As a result, it is possible to make the effect that the game ball may have entered the second start winning device 33b more realistic.

The confused winning sound effect may be created separately from the first winning sound effect and the second winning sound effect, or may be configured by simultaneously outputting the first winning sound effect and the second winning sound effect. good. Further, the first winning sound effect or the confused winning sound effect may be generated based on the detection of the first starting winning switch 224a. In addition, the confused winning sound effect derived based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 constitutes the pseudo winning mode.

Further, for example, it is provided with a first start ball entry measurement counter that counts the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a and a second start ball entry measurement counter that counts the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b, and is sub-controlled. The device 262 compares the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a and the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b per predetermined period, and compares the number of detections of the second starting winning switch 224b with the first starting winning switch 224a with respect to the number of detections of the second starting winning switch 224b. When the ratio of the number of detections is equal to or less than the specified value, the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b.

In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given the impression that the game ball has not entered the first start winning device 33a so much. The function of comparing the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a and the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b per predetermined period of the sub control device 262 constitutes the ball entry ratio determination means.

Further, for example, a sound effect may be added even when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position (excluding during the jackpot state or during the reach effect in the decorative symbol display device 42, or the volume may be lowered). It may be configured as. As an example of the embodiment, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, either the first blade opening sound effect or the second blade opening sound effect is derived, and the blade member 37 is moved to the closed position. When only the pseudo-blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position independently in the maintained state, the sound effect when the second blade is opened may be derived. The sound effect associated with the operation of the pseudo-blade member 431 in the pseudo-blade effect is set separately.

(P) In the above embodiment, the game ball to the start winning device 33a or 33b based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a, the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b, or the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445. The suggestion display suggesting a ball may be configured to be performed at a place other than the start winning unit 401 and the normal symbol display device 41. For example, a predetermined light emitting means (light emitting means built in the center frame 47 or the annular illuminated portion 102 of the front frame set 14) may be made to emit light, or the hold icon 461 of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be made to appear more flashy. In the decorative symbol display device 42, a smaller character may appear, or an aspect (display, sound effect, etc.) originally planned to be derived may be derived at that timing. In this case, there is an opportunity to not see the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b by relying on such a display, or to not see the start winning unit 401 because the player wants to see the display. Can be increased. Therefore, the action and effect of having the game proceed without worrying about the condition of the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b can be further achieved.

(Q; Proximity detection sensor) In the above embodiment, the proximity detection means that can detect the proximity or contact of an object with a plurality of points of the decorative symbol display device 42 and is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. (For example, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the proximity is based on the detection of the finger or the like. If the target for which is detected is the pseudo-hold icon 466, it may be deleted, and if the target for which proximity is detected is the temporary hold icon 464, it may be configured to be switchable to the main hold icon 463. In this case, it is possible to improve the interest in the hold icon 461 and to further enhance the familiarity with the effect (pseudo hold, etc.) that the game ball may have entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b.

(R) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker or the like (so-called mobile interlocking game) via a communication mobile terminal or the like owned by the player. It may be configured so that it can be done. Further, when the mobile interlocking game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code on the mobile communication terminal and the mobile communication terminal. In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 has a first ball entry counter that counts the number of balls entered into the first start winning device 33a, and a second start winning device. It is equipped with a second ball entry counter that counts the number of balls entered into 33b and a pseudo ball entry counter that counts the number of detections of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game. The two-dimensional code may be configured to include information indicating the value of the first ball entry counter, the value of the second ball entry counter, and the value of the pseudo ball entry counter. Further, information on the total number of shots of the game ball may be included in the two-dimensional code. In this case, the gaming machine maker can grasp the condition of the ball entering each of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b.

The value of the first ball entry counter, the value of the second ball entry counter, and the value of the pseudo ball entry counter are erased by being two-dimensionally coded, and other than that (even if the power is turned off). ) It may be accumulated. Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo-blade member 431 may be configured so that the player can select from several types (with respect to the player performing the mobile interlocking game).

(S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is configured to be arranged below the first starting winning device 33a, but for example, it may be configured to be arranged side by side on the left and right sides. .. Further, in the above embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 not only covers the front of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, but also another winning device or the like (for example, the variable winning device 32 or the through gate 34). It may be configured to cover. In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning device 32, the number of through gates 34, and the like are not particularly limited and can be set for each model. For example, two variable winning devices 32 may be provided, or three or more starting winning devices 33a and 33b and a through gate 34 may be provided.

Further, the second start winning device 33b of the above embodiment includes a pair of left and right blade members 37 whose central axis extends in the front-rear direction, but the central axis extends in the left-right direction as in the variable winning device 32, for example. The second start winning device 33b may be configured to change between an open state and a closed state by rotationally displacing the shutter. When this configuration is adopted, for example, the shutter may have a two-sheet structure consisting of a pseudo shutter on the front side (for example, a decoration on the front side) and a main shutter on the rear side (for example, a transparent plate shape). Further, in the case of adopting such a configuration, when the pseudo blade member projects to the rear of the upper side of the pseudo blade shutter and the pseudo blade member is set to the functional position, a folded portion that covers the leading edge portion of the blade member 37 in the open position from the front is provided. It may be configured to be provided. As for the second start winning device 33b, it is also possible to always allow the game ball to enter or omit the blade member 37 as in the first start winning device 33a.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. The number of game balls to be played is set to be the same, but may be set differently. For example, in the configuration in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting prize device 33b as in the above embodiment, the prize balls corresponding to the first starting winning device 33a may be configured to be larger. good.

(T) In the above embodiment, the timing at which the game ball is dispensed from the payout device 358 (see FIG. 5) to the ball tray such as the upper plate 19 via the payout passage 68 (see FIG. 3) can be changed. A possible payout time adjusting means may be provided. In this case, even if the pseudo blade member 431, the pseudo hold icon 466, or the like is provided, the start winning unit depends on whether or not the game ball is paid out (prize ball) based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b. It is taught whether or not the game ball that has entered 401 (covered area on the back surface side of the front decorative portion 403) has entered the start winning prize devices 33a and 33b (either the pseudo-hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464). It is possible to suppress the situation where it is grasped (before).

As an example of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the payout time adjusting means 791 constituting a part of the payout passage 68 communicating between the payout device 358 and the upper plate 19 is in the left-right direction (or the front-back direction). A relatively short distance connects the main passage 792 as the first passage extending in a meandering manner, a predetermined position (first position) of the main passage 792, and a position downstream of the main passage (second position). A closed state (second) provided at the connection portion between the bypass passage 793 as the second passage and the main passage 792 and the bypass passage 793 (the entrance of the bypass passage 793) to guide the game ball to the main passage 792. It is provided with a shutter 794 as a switching means that can be switched between a state (1 guide state) and a state in which the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 793 and a second guide state. Further, the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 passes through the main passage 792 (without passing through the bypass passage 793) to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 is full of game balls). The second time required when the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 is paid out to the upper plate 19 via the bypass passage 793 is shorter than the first time required when the game ball is paid out.

Then, for example, the shutter 794 is opened in the jackpot state or the probabilistic mode in which the game ball is paid out relatively frequently, and the shutter 794 is basically closed in the normal mode in which even a small amount of the game ball is relatively easy to notice. It may be configured to open appropriately instead of keeping it closed). In this case, it becomes difficult to determine when and which winning device the game ball paid out to the upper plate 19 or the like corresponds to, and the starting winning device 33a, 33b is made by paying out the game ball. It is possible to suppress the situation where the prize is guessed.

Further, it is also possible to perform various effects by using the payout time adjusting means 791. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the shutter 794 may be configured to be in the open state based on the operation of the effect button 125 or the like. For example, there are multiple jackpot types with different numbers of rounds, the shutter 794 is basically closed, and the game ball paid out in response to winning the variable winning device 32 in the previous round is a meandering main. When the round is continued while flowing down the passage 792, the shutter 794 is released (and the game ball is discharged to the upper plate 19 at once) based on the operation of the effect button 125 by the player. It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to give an exhilarating feeling that the game ball is paid out by the player's own operation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the shutter 794 may be configured to be maintained in the closed state when the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is not reserved and stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game and leaving the seat before the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 19.

The configuration of the payout time adjusting means 791 is not particularly limited, and for example, a meandering first passage, a second passage attached to the first passage and extending substantially linearly, and a payout device 358. A switching valve that can be switched between a first guide state for guiding the game ball discharged from the first passage and a second guide state for guiding the game ball discharged from the payout device 358 to the second passage. It may be configured to be provided. Further, the time required when the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 is paid out to the upper plate 19 via the payout passage varies depending not only on the distance of the payout passage but also on the angle and shape (course). ..

(U) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may operate in the same manner as the jackpot state of "2RS", and may set a jackpot to which the "normal mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the above embodiment, the "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state of "2RS" is completed, but instead, it is in a low ball entry state and a high probability state, and further, in the decorative symbol display device 42. May be configured to provide a "latent mode" that does not teach whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state.

It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the instruction about winning the probabilistic jackpot (15RS) with a payout is always given until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest. , It is not performed even if the corresponding jackpot state ends (even in the internally probabilistic mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same pullback stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43L in the time reduction mode. , 43R may be configured to shift to the probability change stage when the fluctuation display of 43R exceeds the upper limit number of times (100 times) of the time reduction mode.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery is changed, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high-entry state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns (number of fluctuations) are prepared. Further, in the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a (and the second starting winning device 33b), the variable winning device 32 operates in the same manner as the jackpot state of "2RS", while the game mode is It may be configured so that a "small hit" that does not change may be won.

Further, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the upper limit of winning the game ball in one opening to the second starting winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, when a start winning upper limit counter is provided to count the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b until the winning limit is reached, and the second starting winning switch 224b is detected. (For example, after step S503 of the start winning process), when a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the start winning upper limit counter is performed and the second start winning device 33b is opened (for example, a step of the general figure discrimination information setting process). After S2405 and step S2407, a value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set for the starting winning upper limit counter (for example, 1 is set if the winning upper limit is one), and the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state. Whether or not the value of the start winning upper limit counter has become "0" when the timing to close the state has not yet arrived (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2204 of the start winning device control process). If a negative determination is made, the start winning device control process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made, the second start winning device 33b is immediately closed (step S2205). Also, in the process (for example, after step S2218) performed when the second start winning device 33b has the right to be opened a plurality of times, the starting prize upper limit counter corresponds to the winning upper limit. (For example, if the upper limit of winning is one, set 1).

(V) In the above embodiment, the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Regardless of which one is used, the corresponding variation display is reserved in the order of entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, and the variation display is digested in order from the previously reserved variation display. However, the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the second variable display held after the first variable display already held is digested before the first variable display, and so on, so that the reserved order is changed. The second variation display may be configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the case where the ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33b are performed. It is configured so that the distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be given is the same as the case where the jackpot is won in the win / fail lottery, but the win / fail is performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. Separate jackpot type tables may be referred to for the lottery and the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, and the jackpot type may be distributed differently. For example, when a big hit is won in a winning or losing lottery based on a prize in the second starting winning device 33b, a big hit is won in a winning or losing lottery based on a winning in the first starting winning device 33a. The ratio of jackpots with balls is high, and the percentage of jackpots with probability variation mode (not latent mode) is high (the percentage of high probability states is the same). It may be selected if the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the second starting winning device 33b, and if the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning device 33a. It may be configured so that a jackpot of no type can be given.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the prize ball given to the player in the case where the ball is entered in the first starting prize device 33a and the case where the ball is entered in the second starting winning device 33b. Although they are configured to have different numbers, they may be configured to be the same.

(W) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the main process (see FIG. 9) and then the normal process (see FIG. 10), but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the process of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

(X) In the above embodiment, the information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs is overwritten in the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. Not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided for the execution area of the special fluctuation hold area and each hold area in addition to the winning random number storage area. In addition to the area, an execution area of the special variable hold area and a storage area corresponding to each hold area may be provided individually, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variable selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is reconfirmed whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to the winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (state of the winning / failing flag or the like). ) May be configured so that the variable display pattern or the like is determined.

(Y) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a gaming ball moving in a gaming area can enter, an open state that allows entry into a specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into a specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means provided with a wing member), specific ball-entry means and non-specific ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. Detects a specific ball entry detection means (condition detection means), a special starting means that is provided outside the specific area and allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the special starting means. It is provided with a special start detecting means for detecting the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. Regardless of which of the balls is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player, and the main control means uses the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection of the special start detection means. A specified number of variable winning means that are opened only once or multiple times, or that the variable ball-entry means are opened for a second time longer than the first hour, or are opened. One round is until the game ball enters, and a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which this is repeated a specified number of times. It may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state when a jackpot is won in a win / fail lottery or when a specific ball entry detection means is detected.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting winning means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a winning / failing lottery is performed using a variable display means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

Further, as the starting winning means, for example, a first starting winning means capable of always entering a game ball and a second starting winning means capable of entering a game ball only when a predetermined open lottery is won. In a configuration provided with a starting winning means, if the open lottery is not won and it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the first starting winning means, it becomes relatively difficult to proceed with the game smoothly. At the same time, there is a concern that the image of the gaming machine will deteriorate and the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, for example, by arranging the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means close to each other and increasing the chance that the second starting winning means is opened, even if the first starting winning means is used. Even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning means, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the ease of entering the starting winning means as a whole. It is conceivable to adopt.

However, in general, pachinko machines are basically a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first starting winning means capable of always entering a game ball. Therefore, the impression of whether or not the game ball is easy to enter the first start winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, by improving the ease of entering the second starting winning means, it is possible to compensate for the difficulty in allowing the gaming ball to enter the first starting winning means (even if the first starting winning means). Even if the ease of entering the game ball into the ball is reduced, the ease of entering the game ball as a whole into the first and second starting winning means is not inferior, or rather improved). Even so, if it is still difficult to get the game ball into the first starting winning means and the state of not (almost) not entering is repeated, the impression of the game machine or the game hall where the game machine is installed is given. There is concern that it will worsen.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to deteriorate the impression caused by a decrease in the ease of entering a gaming ball into the first starting winning means. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing.

Means A-1-a. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
The first starting winning means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
The game is configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter (the game is more than the first start winning means. The second start winning means (located on the downstream side of the area) and
The first start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start prize means, and the first start prize detection means.
The second start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start prize means, and the second start prize detection means.
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. A gaming machine provided with a main control means for generating the special gaming state.
A pre-covering means provided in the game area at a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and at least covers the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means together. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the means A-1-a, by providing the pre-covering means that collectively covers the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, the surroundings of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means are provided. The visibility of the moving game ball is relatively reduced, and it becomes difficult to understand whether the game ball has entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. Therefore, the second start winning means is set to be open in a balance that reduces the time zone in which the player is likely to feel stress, such as not being able to receive the winning / failing lottery even though the game ball is being fired. If so, the player can enter the game ball into either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means as long as the game ball is allowed to enter the back side of the front covering means. It is possible to proceed with the game as if the winning or losing lottery was received. In other words, even if the entry rate of the game ball to the first start winning means is low, if the game ball enters the second start winning means relatively easily, the winning / failing lottery can be constantly received. , There is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first start winning means or the second start winning means. Therefore, the first start is gradually performed. I don't care whether or not the game ball is easy to enter as a winning means. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression caused by that, and it is stressed too much. You can proceed with the game without stress.

Further, by providing the pre-covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portion of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. That is, if the game ball is launched aiming at the front covering means, it is possible to obtain a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered into either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. Further, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the pre-covering means that collectively covers the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, and the design can be improved.

In addition, as the pre-covering means, the portion covering the first starting winning means and the portion covering the second starting winning means may be integrally formed (integrally molded or combined with each other). , Those composed of separate bodies may be arranged adjacent to each other. Further, "the portion of the front covering means through which the game ball can pass at least behind the gaming area (for example, the front of the winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means" is covered. In the part other than the part), it may be configured to have transparency (consisting of a transparent or translucent material, forming a slit, etc.). " In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes anxious because he / she cannot see what is happening behind the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place for teaching the player predetermined information. For example, the front covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning / failing lottery, etc.) or display an image character or the like. In addition, it may be stated that "the pre-covering means is attached to the game board".

Means A-1-b. The first start winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the second start winning means.
The game nails erected on the front surface of the game board include a pair of left and right life nails provided above the left and right side portions of the winning opening of the first starting winning means, and pass between the pair of life nails. The game ball is configured to enter the first starting winning means.
The gaming machine according to means A-1-a, wherein the pre-covering means is configured to cover the front of the life nail as well.

According to the means A-1-b, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first start winning means. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning means can be made based on various matters derived as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning means. .. As a result, it is possible to further promote a game that is not so particular about the pace at which the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

Means A-2-a. The second start winning means includes a blade member that can be displaced between an open position that allows a game ball to enter the second start winning means and a closed position that regulates the ball.
The means A is characterized in that the pre-covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and the front of a part of the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine described in -1.

According to the means A-2, in the second starting winning means, the blade member is set to the open position, so that the game ball moving in the game area is allowed to enter the open state, and the blade member is set to the closed position. By doing so, it becomes a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball.

In addition, "the second start winning means receives a game ball moving in the game area and moves the ball receiving portion that guides the game ball to the outside of the game area and the game area on the side of the ball receiving part. Between the open position that guides the game ball to the ball receiving portion and the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball that moves in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion side. It may be provided with a displaceable blade member. " Further, the front covering means constitutes a part of the starting winning means (for example, the front wall of the ball receiving portion that receives the game ball moving in the game area and guides it to the opening side formed in the game board). May be.

Means A-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display unit in the shape of a first object.
The blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to means A-3-b described later) includes a second object display unit in the shape of a second object.
The second object is formed by setting the blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) to the open position (functional position corresponding to the means A-3-b). Is in the completed display state that forms the third object together with the first object.
The second object is set to the closed position (the standby position corresponding to the means A-3-b) by setting the blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b). The gaming machine according to means A-2-a, wherein all or most of the above objects are hidden behind the first object in an unfinished display state.

According to the means A-2-b, a first object display unit is provided for the pre-covering means, and the blade member (a pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b described later) is provided. When the open position is reached, by providing a second object display unit that displays the second object in which the third object is shaped together with the first object, the third object that partially moves with the movement of the blade member can be used. While gathering the line of sight, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front covering means and reduce the player's interest in the appearance of the game ball entering the starting winning means. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means is further achieved.

Means A-2-c. The tip of the blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) in the open position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front covering means. The gaming machine according to the featured means A-2-a or A-2-b.

According to the means A-2-c, it is easy to recognize that the blade member is displaced to the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b, the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position). can.

Means A-2-d-1. It is provided with an open covering means that is arranged in front of the blade member and covers the front of the blade member in the open position, and a closed covering means that covers the front of the blade member in the closed position. The gaming machine according to the featured means A-2-a.

According to the means A-2-d-1, since the blade members in the closed position and the open position are hidden, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the blade member is in the open position or the closed position.

Means A-2-d-2. The pre-covering means includes an object display unit in the shape of a predetermined object.
The object display unit includes an open covering unit as an open covering means that covers the front of the blade member in the open position, and a closed covering means that covers the front of the blade member in the closed position. The gaming machine according to means A-2-d-1, characterized by having a closed covering portion.

According to the means A-2-d-2, by providing the object display unit for the front covering means, the line of sight is focused on the front covering means, while the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is lowered or the starting is started. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the winning means. Further, since the blade member is hidden by the open cover portion and the closed cover portion, it is difficult to grasp whether the blade member is in the open position or the closed position. In addition, as the object display unit, by utilizing the displacement of the blade member, it is possible to derive an aspect as if the object is moving (due to the afterimage effect).

Means A-2-e. The first start winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the second start winning means.
The game nails erected on the front surface of the game board include a pair of left and right life nails provided above the left and right side portions of the winning opening of the first starting winning means, and pass between the pair of life nails. The game ball is configured to enter the first starting winning means.
The object display unit of the pre-covering means has an index unit indicating an appropriate position of the life nail (head) at a position in the vicinity of the pair of life nails. The gaming machine according to any one of 2-b to A-2-d.

According to the means A-2-e, the pair of left and right life nails and the index part are compared to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails is wide or narrow. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to relatively determine whether or not maintenance is required for the life nails, and the player can tell himself / herself when the distance between the life nails is narrower than that of the index unit. You can avoid the game so as not to be disadvantageous. As a result, the distance between the life nails can be made as constant as possible, and the variation in the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means can be reduced for each machine. In particular, since the index portion is provided in the pre-covering means, it is close to the tip portion (head) of the life nail, whereby the inclination of the life nail can be grasped more reliably.

Means A-3-a. At least a portion of the precoating means is transparent and
A pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position) when the blade member is in the closed position is provided. The gaming machine according to means A-2, characterized in that it is present.

If the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting winning means. For this reason, the player who admits that the blade member is in the closed position tends to shift his / her line of sight to the first starting winning means and observe whether or not the game ball enters the first starting winning means. ..

In this respect, according to the means A-3-a, a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position is derived even if it is not the timing to open the second starting winning means. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member occurs from the visual mode in which the second starting winning means is closed. Therefore, if the player is interested in opening the second start winning means, if he admits that some action has occurred in the closed second start winning means, the second starting winning means will be activated. It is also conceivable to turn the line of sight to the second start winning means, which may have been opened. However, in reality, there are cases where the pseudo-blade opening mode is used, and since the pseudo-blade opening mode is such that the blade member is present in the open position, the second starting winning means is suddenly changed. It is possible to distinguish whether the blade member is in the open position just by looking at it or entering the edge of the field of view, or whether the blade member is in the closed position just by deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode. It is difficult, or the blade member is misunderstood (for a moment) as being displaced to the open position.

As described above, the pseudo-blade opening mode is only for making the blade member appear as if it has been opened, so that the blade member seems to be opened, but the game ball is used as the second starting winning means. The appearance of the game ball of the second starting winning means does not always match the appearance of the second starting winning means, such as no sign of entering the ball. Then, when the pseudo-blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game ball is constantly entering the second starting winning means and the like and there is no delay in the game (the game ball does not enter the starting winning means too much). (Unless you are forced to play a disadvantageous game due to this), you can reach a feeling that you do not care much about whether or not the blade member is in the open state. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by that is further enhanced. It will be played.

Further, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second start winning means is in the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade opening mode. Therefore, there is a disparity between advanced players and beginner players who can play games such that the second starting winning means is opened and the game balls are fired only at the timing when the game balls can enter. Can be suppressed from opening.

Further, by utilizing the pseudo-blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect related to the opening and closing of the blade member and an effect as a mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade member. In addition, as the game progresses, the pseudo-blade opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, and it becomes an accent / liveliness or a rhythm (feels lonely when it disappears) in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In the state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, the pseudo blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned regardless of whether the blade member is in the closed position or not. It is desirable that the configuration is such that the change in the visual mode of the place where the image is to be seen is small. For example, when a cover is provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized and a design imitating (the shape of the front surface of) the blade member is applied. In this case, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the pseudo-blade opening mode is only derived, or whether the blade member is actually in the open position (whether the blade member is in the closed position), and the pseudo-blade becomes more difficult to determine. The action and effect of providing the means will be further exerted.

Means A-3-b-1. The pseudo-blade opening means is arranged in front of the blade member, and can cover the functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position and the front of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position and
A means characterized in that when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo-blade member is in the functional position, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo-blade member. The gaming machine according to A-3-a.

According to the means A-3-b-1, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived more realistically. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo-blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member behind the blade member, but in this case, the pseudo-blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward, so that the pseudo-blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward. Even if the blade opening means is set to the pseudo blade opening mode, there is a concern that it will be difficult to see. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo-blade opening means in the pseudo-blade opening mode. As a result, it may be instantly grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, by providing the pseudo-blade member in front of the blade member, the above-mentioned concern can be dispelled.

Further, since the pseudo-blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is in the closed position, the pseudo-blade member can be moved without inviting more game balls to enter the second starting winning means. Fully utilize the operating mode (for example, the mode in which the character operates when the pseudo-blade member is a part of the character display, the mode in which the second starting winning means opens and closes (subtly), etc.) for the production and the like. Can be done.

The shape of the pseudo-blade member is not limited to a plate shape, for example, a square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo-blade member and can accommodate the blade member inside, or the square frame shape. It may be configured in a substantially U-shaped cross section such that a part is cut out. Further, with respect to the means A-2-c, the pseudo-blade member at the functional position may protrude outward from the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, by making it easy to understand the location of the pseudo-blade member, the effect using the pseudo-blade member is recognized, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. You can have the game progress while suppressing the fact that you are being played.

Means A-3-b-2. The pseudo-blade opening means according to means A-3-b-1, wherein when the blade member is displaced to the open position, the pseudo-blade member is also displaced to the functional position. Gaming machine.

According to the means A-3-b-2, when the blade member is in the open position, the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the blade member is in the closed position but the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The mode in which the pseudo-blade member is viewed from the front can be the same (both of which the pseudo-blade member in the functional position is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be further enhanced. Further, when the configuration is adopted, it is not necessary to make the aspect of the front surface side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member, and processing such as drawing a figure on the front surface of the blade member is particularly performed. You don't have to do it. Therefore, the configuration of the blade member can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member and the design is deteriorated. It is possible to prevent such things as being done.

Means A-3-b-3. The blade member and the pseudo-blade member are rotatably configured, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo-blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine according to 3-b-1 or A-3-b-2.

According to the means A-3-b-3, the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member can be synchronized relatively easily. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the action and effect such as making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member can be further achieved. It is also possible that the pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be extended on the same straight line relatively easily.

Means A-3-b-4. The blade member presses the pseudo-blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and the blade-side pressing that displaces the pseudo-blade member from the standby position to the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-3, characterized in that the unit is provided.

According to the means A-3-b-4, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member is driven accordingly. Become. Therefore, it is avoided that each of them operates separately, and the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be synchronized and moved as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position deviate from each other, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether or not it is just done.

When the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade are used. Of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member, the blade-side driving means may be driven.

Means A-3-b-5. The pseudo-blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, and the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-4, characterized in that the unit is provided.

According to the means A-3-b-5, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member is driven accordingly. Become. Therefore, it is avoided that each of them operates separately, and the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be synchronized and moved as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the standby position deviate from each other, and the blade member exists in the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether or not it only existed in.

When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade are used. Of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member, the pseudo-side driving means may be driven.

Means A-3-b-6. Means A-3-b, characterized in that the blade member is colorless and transparent, or is made of a material having a hue of the same system as the color of the member located behind the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-3-b-5.

According to the means A-3-b-6, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means A-3-b-7. A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means is provided.
The opening / closing control of the second start winning means is executed by the main control means.
The drive control of the pseudo-blade opening means is executed by the sub-control means (corresponding to the information regarding the opening / closing of the second start winning means from the main control means) A-3-. The gaming machine according to b-1 to A-3-b-6.

According to the means A-3-b-7, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control means.

Means A-3-b-8. The pseudo-blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position.
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo-blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position.
Prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, the main control means outputs release schedule information to the effect that the blade member is displaced to the open position to the sub control means.
The gaming machine according to means A-3-b-7, wherein the sub-control means displaces the pseudo-blade member to the standby position when the opening schedule information is received.

According to the means A-3-b-8, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member in the middle of displacement is replaced by the pseudo blade member. It is possible to avoid a situation where it cannot be covered.

Means A-3-b-9. The pseudo-blade member has a larger front area than the vane member.
When the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the standby position side with respect to the surface on the closed position side of the blade member. Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the functional position side with respect to the surface of the blade member on the open position side. The gaming machine according to means A-3-b-7 or means A-3-b-8, wherein the player is located on the open position side.

When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly different from each other. In this regard, according to the means A-3-b-9, the blade member is configured to be excessively covered with the pseudo-blade member on the operating direction side of the blade member that can operate first, and the blade member is displaced slightly in advance. Even if it does, it will be within the range covered by the pseudo-blade member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent it from becoming easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, or to cause a deterioration in design due to a deviation between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. can.

Means A-3-b-10. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, and are arranged below the central portion of the game board.
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member arranged in front of the blade member is from the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-9, which is configured to be located above.

Generally, when a player plays a game machine, the player's face is in a positional relationship so as to face the central portion of the game board. When the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, the player's line of sight to the blade member and the pseudo-blade member is directed diagonally downward (the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are slanted). It looks like you can look into it from above. Therefore, even if the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are arranged in the front-rear direction, there is a concern that the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be distinguished from each other in an instant.

On the other hand, according to the means A-3-b-10, since the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade in the open position The member and the pseudo-blade member at the functional position can be relatively arranged so as to overlap each other as much as possible when viewed from the front upper side. Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means A-3-c-1. The pseudo-blade opening means is
A pseudo-open object that is provided at a position that overlaps the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction and imitates the blade member in the open position.
The gaming machine according to means A-3-a or A-3-b, characterized in that the pseudo-open object is provided with a pseudo light source for irradiating light.

According to the means A-3-c-1, a pseudo blade opening mode can be derived while adopting a relatively simple configuration. It should be noted that the pseudo-blade member as described in means A-3-b may be used in combination.

Means A-3-c-2. At least a part of the pre-covering means is configured as a light guide plate, and by injecting light from the end onto the light guide plate by the pseudo light source, the blade member in the open position of the light guide plate The gaming machine according to means A-3-c-1, wherein the pseudo-open object is configured to emerge at a position covering the front.

According to the means A-3-c-2, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the pre-covering means, and the visibility of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be improved. Further, in the pre-covering means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the pseudo light source emits light.

Means A-3-c-3. The pseudo-open object is characterized in that it is provided at a position where the front is covered by the blade member in the open position (in the base plate for attaching the second start winning means to the game board). The gaming machine according to means A-3-c-1 or A-3-c-2.

According to the means A-3-c-3, a pseudo blade opening mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration behind the blade member (base plate).

Means A-3-c-4. The blade member (“pseudo-blade member” when the configuration of the means A-3-b is used together) includes a light emitting means that can be visually recognized from the front.
Described in any one of means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-3, wherein the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means is formed at least by imitating the light emitting means. Gaming machine.

According to the means A-3-c-4, the blade member (pseudo-blade member) has a visible mode in which it emits light even if it is attached, so that the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo-open object. And the pseudo-blade opening mode by the pseudo-blade opening means using the pseudo-light source can be more strongly linked (it is confused by the intuitive judgment at a glance). Further, it is possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it is sufficient to imitate only the light emitting means instead of the whole).

Means A-3-c-5. The pseudo-open object is not only at a position that overlaps the blade member at the open position in the front-rear direction, but also at a position that overlaps the blade member at the closed position in the front-rear direction, and at a position that overlaps the blade member at the open position in the front-rear direction. It is also provided at the position between the overlapping position and
The pseudo light source is any one of means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-4, characterized in that each of the pseudo-open objects can be sequentially irradiated with light. The described gaming machine.

According to the means A-3-c-5, it is possible to derive an embodiment in which the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, more realistic and various pseudo-blade opening modes can be derived.

Means A-4-a. When the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected, a ball entry detection compatible display means capable of deriving a ball entry detection compatible display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, characterized in that

According to the means A-4-a, even if the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means are not directly visually recognized, the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means or the second starting winning means can be visually recognized by visually recognizing the ball entry detection corresponding display means. It is possible to grasp (rather, it is easy to grasp) that the game ball enters the starting winning means and the right to receive the winning / losing lottery is obtained. Therefore, the chance of directly seeing the starting winning means is reduced, and even if the winning rate to the first starting winning means is relatively low, the overall winning rate to the first and second starting winning means is high. If it is not low, put yourself in a situation where you do not care whether the game ball enters either the 1st start winning means or the 2nd starting winning means. It is possible to (do not fall into the situation). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which a game ball does not easily enter the first starting winning means, which causes a decrease in interest. On the other hand, even if it becomes a little difficult to see how the game ball enters the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means, it is possible to indicate whether or not the ball has entered the ball entry detection corresponding display means. Since it can be confirmed firmly with, it is possible to give a sense of security to the player.

Means A-4-b-1. In the covered area of the game area whose front is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
The game according to means A-4-a, which is configured to be configured to be able to derive a pseudo-winning mode as if the start-up winning detection means was detected based on the detection of the pseudo-winning detecting means. Machine.

According to the means A-4-b-1, a pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting winning means in the covering region whose front is covered by the pre-covering means. That is, in a configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively low due to the provision of the front covering means, the front covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. Derivation of a pseudo-winning mode such that a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back surface side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, for detecting a pseudo-winning detecting means installed in the covering area as in the starting winning means). Based on this, a reaction similar to the case where the start prize detection means is detected is derived, and if it is derived, it is suggested whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detection means). Can be done. Therefore, as the action of the game ball with respect to the starting winning means, it is possible to add a pattern of "may have entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of staging and diversify the staging. As a result, the value of providing a front covering means to make it difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means (directing whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means) is dramatically increased. It is possible to improve the interest.

The pseudo winning detection means may be provided on the downstream side of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, or may be provided on the upstream side of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. However, it may be provided on the downstream side of one of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means and on the upstream side of the other. Further, when the pseudo winning detection means is on the upstream side of the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means, the game ball detected by the pseudo winning detecting means becomes the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. It may be configured to allow entry into the ball, or may be configured to prevent entry into the ball. In addition, examples of the pseudo-winning mode include a display mode in a predetermined display means, a voice mode by a voice output means, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting means, a combination thereof, and the like. Further, as a pseudo winning mode, for example, when detection is performed by the first starting winning means, the second starting winning means, and the pseudo winning detecting means, the ball winning detection compatible display means displays the ball winning detection. As a preliminary step to the above, a mode (including a pseudo winning mode) that the right to receive the winning / failing lottery may have been derived is derived, and then the detection is performed by the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. Derived from the mode (indication corresponding to ball entry detection) indicating that the right to receive the winning / failing lottery was obtained, and if the detection was performed by the pseudo winning detection means, the right to receive the winning / failing lottery could not be obtained. It is possible to perform an effect such as deriving an aspect indicating that.

Means A-4-b-2. When the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the pseudo-ball-entry detection-compatible display in the ball-entry detection-compatible display means is different from the ball-in-ball detection-compatible display that imitates the ball-in-ball detection-compatible display. The gaming machine according to A-4-b-1, wherein the pseudo-hold icon) can be derived.

In the configuration in which the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed when the game ball enters the starting winning means, even if the front covering means makes it difficult to see the state of the gaming ball entering the starting winning means, etc. At the time when the ball entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is directly grasped that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this respect, by making it possible to display the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display as in the means A-4-b-2, the game ball is still the starting prize-winning means even at the timing when the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed. It is possible to postpone the fact that the result of whether or not the ball has entered is known, and it is possible to produce either a display corresponding to ball entry detection or a display corresponding to pseudo ball entry detection. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting prize means even more interesting. As a result, the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means) can be dramatically increased, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that "when the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected while the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed, the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed. Instead, it may be configured so that the ball entry detection compatible display can be derived. " In this case, it is possible to make the visual mode of the area where the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display are displayed relatively neat. Further, it may be set that "the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is erased after a lapse of a predetermined time after being displayed". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is displayed indefinitely and the role of the pseudo-balloon detection compatible display becomes difficult to understand.

Means A-4-b-3. When the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected, the pseudo ball entry detection is performed before the ball entry detection corresponding display (this hold icon) corresponding to the detection is derived. The gaming machine according to means A-4-b-2, characterized in that a precursor display (temporary hold icon) having the same aspect as the corresponding display (pseudo hold icon) can be derived.

According to the means A-4-b-3, when the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display or the precursor display is displayed, the ball entry detection is performed while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the ball entry detection compatible display. It is possible to clarify the difference between the corresponding display and the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (it is easy to understand that the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is not the ball entry detection compatible display). In other words, if you look closely at the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display, it will be different, but if the mode is similar or indistinguishable, the player will pseudo-enter. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball detection compatible display is assumed to be a ball detection compatible display and the person feels distrust.

Means A-4-b-4. Variable display means that can display identification information in a variable manner,
The variable display means includes display control means for varyingly displaying the identification information and stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning / failing lottery after a predetermined time.
When the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means are detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information used for the winning / failing lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number is provided.
When the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means are detected during the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is displayed. , It is a configuration performed after the variable display of the identification information during execution.
The mode of the ball entry detection compatible display of the ball entry detection compatible display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means A-. The gaming machine according to 4-b-3.

According to the means A-4-b-4, it is possible to perform a wider variety of effects by using the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. For example, when a predetermined type of pseudo-ball-entry detection-compatible display is derived based on the detection of the first start-up prize detection means and the second start-up prize detection means, and this is changed to the ball-entry detection-compatible display. , It is possible to perform suggestive effects such as increasing expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state. In addition, "in a state where the number of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means has reached the upper limit, even if the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the pseudo-entry ball. Do not derive the detection-compatible display. "

Means A-4-b-5. When the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is displayed, an additional display having a mode different from the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-2 to A-4-b-4.

According to the means A-4-b-5, the mode of the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display has not been determined by setting the mode of the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display to a mode in which at least a part thereof has not been clarified. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that there is a possibility of further changes in the display corresponding to pseudo-ball entry detection. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display with the ball entry detection compatible display, and misunderstands the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display as the ball entry detection compatible display. (For example, a pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is only performed, but by misunderstanding this as a ball entry detection compatible display, a process that can be executed when the ball entry detection compatible display is performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the fact that is not executed. It should be noted that "the additional display is also derived from the precursor display" and "when the ball entry detection compatible display is derived instead of the precursor display, the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is supported. The additional display that has been displayed may be erased. "

Means A-4-b-6. A detection history storage means capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-5, characterized in that the storage information of the detection history storage means can be output.

According to the means A-4-b-6, by recognizing the pseudo-winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player has entered the pseudo-winning). In the unlikely event that a problem occurs due to a ball detection compatible display being mistaken for an incoming ball detection compatible display, data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, it can be displayed by a variable display means or the like). It will be sent to the hall computer), and it is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble is complicated.

Means A-4-b-7. A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-6, wherein the pseudo-winning detecting means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

According to the means A-4-b-7, the control load of the main control means can be reduced by reducing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of configurations for inputting the information to the main control means as much as possible. , It is possible to suppress fraud to the main control means.

Means A-4-b-8. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger for the winning / failing lottery, and a state in which the detection is invalid.
In a state in which the detection by the starting prize detecting means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means is effective.
Any of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-7, characterized in that the detection of the pseudo-winning detection means is invalidated in the state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A-4-b-8, the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed in a state where the ball entry detection compatible display is not supposed to be displayed, so that the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display can be obtained. It is possible to avoid a situation where it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display corresponding to the pseudo-entry detection is unnecessarily derived, which causes a decrease in the interest.

Means A-5. In the gaming area, the covering area whose front is covered by the pre-covering means, or the position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covering area (corresponding to the means A-2-a, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4, characterized in that a course changing means for changing the traveling direction of the gaming ball is provided at a position below the blade member in the open position. ..

For example, if the game ball enters the covered area and the blade member is in the open position, the blade member will reach the guide point guided by the blade member to the starting winning means (ball receiving portion). When in the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area as it is without being guided by the blade member, and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game ball is discharged from the covered area extend in a substantially straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area earlier wins the first start. It is immediately recognized as being discharged from the covering area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

In this respect, since the course changing means is provided in the covering region as in the means A-5, the traveling direction of the game ball changes in the covering region and the traveling speed of the game ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to a place that is easily visible to the outside, and the game ball is the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. You can create more situations where you may or may not have entered the ball.

In particular, for means A-4-b-2, ball entry detection is performed rather than directly visually recognizing the first start winning means and the second start winning means to confirm whether or not the game ball has entered. Ball entry detection of the corresponding display means It is possible to easily shift to a playability such as confirming the entry of a ball into the first start winning means and the second start winning means by the corresponding display. For this reason, by visually recognizing how the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning means, it is possible to suppress the inability to concentrate on the production and the accumulation of stress, and the whereabouts of the game involving the production. Can be absorbed by.

In addition, corresponding to the means A-4-b-1, "the course changing means is provided with a pseudo winning guiding means for guiding a game ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo winning detecting means. May be. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it must be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. It is possible to avoid the situation where it hardly works. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area until it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means becomes longer, and the game ball which has entered the covered area and the game ball. The action and effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering area are more remarkable.

Means A-6-a. At least a part of the pre-covering means is displaceably provided and
A decorative driving means for displacement-moving the front covering means is provided.
The decorative drive means is any one of means A-1 to A-5 characterized in that the decorative drive means is configured to be driveable based on the detection of the first start prize detection means or the second start prize detection means. The described gaming machine.

According to the means A-6-a, since it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means by the operation of the pre-covering means, the first starting winning means or the first starting winning means or the first. 2 It is possible to proceed with the game with a relative sense of security without confirming how the game ball directly enters the starting winning means. As a result, attention can be paid to the effect of teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery.

It should be noted that "the front covering means may be configured to be displaceable in the same manner regardless of whether the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected". Further, corresponding to the means A-4-b-1, "the decoration driving means is configured to be able to be driven even when the pseudo-winning detecting means is detected". good.

Means A-6-b. Described in means A-6-a, wherein the pre-covering means is configured to be displaceable based on contact of a gaming ball with the pre-covering means even in a non-driving state of the decorative driving means. Gaming machine.

According to the means A-6-b, it is possible to add fun to the operation of the pre-covering means. Furthermore, since the front covering means is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front covering means, there is an expectation for beginner players that the game ball has almost always entered the starting winning means. You can have it.

In the non-driving state of the decorative driving means, the link mechanism for interlocking the decorative driving means and the front covering means is not meshed, and in the non-driving state of the decorative driving means, the front covering means is supported by an elastic body. It may be configured to be. Further, the link mechanism for interlocking the decorative driving means and the pre-covering means transmits the driving force of the decorative driving means to the pre-covering means (for example, the pre-covering means is pivotally supported) via the elastic means. A part of the shaft portion may be configured like a coil spring).

Means A-7-a. The first prize sound effect corresponding to the detection of the first start prize detection means and
The second prize sound effect corresponding to the detection of the second start prize detection means, and
A sound effect generating means capable of generating the first winning sound effect and the confused winning sound effect close to the second winning sound effect is provided.
The sound effect generating means is
Based on the detection of the first start winning prize detecting means, the first winning sound effect (or the confused winning sound effect; when used as an effect) is generated.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized in that the second winning sound effect or the confused winning sound effect is generated based on the detection of the second starting prize detecting means.

According to the means A-7-a, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, the sound effect can be used to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means, so that the game can proceed more smoothly. be able to. The confused winning sound effect may be created separately from the first winning sound effect and the second winning sound effect, or may be configured by simultaneously outputting the first winning sound effect and the second winning sound effect. good. Further, corresponding to the means A-4-b-1, "the confusion winning sound effect may be generated even when the pseudo winning detecting means is detected". In this case, it is possible to make the effect that the game ball may have entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means more realistic.

Means A-7-b. A ball entry ratio determining means for comparing the number of detections of the first start winning detection means and the number of detections of the second start winning detection means per predetermined period is provided.
When the ratio of the number of detections of the first start winning detection means to the number of detections of the second start winning detection means by the ball entry ratio determining means is equal to or less than a specified value, the sound effect generating means is the second start. The gaming machine according to means A-7-a, wherein the confusion winning sound effect is generated based on the detection of the winning detecting means.

According to the means A-7b, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given the impression that the game ball is not so much entered in the first start winning means.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting winning means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a winning / failing lottery is performed using a variable display means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

Further, as a starting winning means, there is a method provided with an openable starting winning means in which a game ball can be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won. By the way, in general, although the production for teaching the result of the open lottery as to whether or not the openable start winning means is opened is performed, the openable start winning means itself is in accordance with the open lottery. Just opening and closing it made it uninteresting.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a novel opening / closing start winning means.

Means B-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
An open / close start winning means configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.
A start winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the opening / closing start winning means, and a start winning detection means.
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. It is a gaming machine equipped with
The open / close start winning means includes a blade member that can be displaced between an open position that allows a ball to enter the open / close start winning means and a closed position that regulates the ball.
A pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position) when the blade member is in the closed position is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the means B-1, a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position is derived even if it is not the timing to open the open / close type start winning means. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member occurs from the visual mode in which the open / close start winning means is closed. That is, as a visual mode of the open / close start winning means, a mode of "may be open" can be added in addition to "open" and "closed". Therefore, the mode of the opening / closing type start winning means becomes more diverse, and the pseudo-blade opening mode is used to produce an effect related to the opening / closing of the blade member and to suggest other states (suggestion of the game mode to stay). , Suggestion of the result of variable display, etc.), or as a mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade members. As a result, it is possible to install a novel opening / closing start winning means that can diversify the directing performance and the playability, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the open / close type start winning means is in the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade opening mode. Therefore, there is a disparity between advanced players and beginner players who can play games such as launching a game ball only when the opening / closing start winning means is opened and the game ball can enter. Can be suppressed from opening.

Further, for example, when the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball cannot be entered into the open / close type start winning means, so that a normal start moving winning means capable of always entering the game ball is provided separately. In that case, the game ball will be launched aiming at the always-start moving winning means. Here, if it is difficult to insert the gaming ball into the always-start dynamic winning means, there is a concern that the image of the gaming machine may deteriorate and the motivation for playing the game may be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, by increasing the chances that the openable start winning means will be opened, even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal start dynamic winning means, the openable start winning means will have the game ball. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that makes it easier to enter the ball and avoids a decrease in the ease of entering the starting winning means as a whole.

However, in general, pachinko machines are based on the game of launching a game ball aiming at a always-start dynamic winning means that can always enter the game ball. For this reason, the impression of whether or not the game ball is easy to enter the always-start dynamic winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, by improving the ease of entering the open / close start winning means, it is possible to make up for the amount of difficulty in allowing the gaming ball to enter the constantly starting moving winning means (even if the always starting moving winning means). Even if the ease of entering the pachinko ball into the ball is reduced, the ease of entering the game ball as a whole into the starting winning means is not inferior, or rather improved). If it is difficult to enter the pachinko ball into the always-start dynamic winning means and the state of not (almost) entering the ball is repeated, the impression of the pachinko machine or the game hall where the pachinko machine is installed deteriorates. Is a concern.

Therefore, the means B-1 states that "a pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position is provided". Therefore, even when the blade member is in the closed position, if the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived, the player is more interested in the open / close type start winning means than the normal start moving winning means. Can be pulled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the always-start moving winning means, which causes a decrease in interest.

Further, the pseudo-blade opening mode is only for pretending that the blade member is opened, so that the blade member seems to be opened, but the game ball enters the openable start winning means. The appearance of the open / close start winning means does not always match the appearance of the game ball of the open / close start winning means. Then, when the pseudo-blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game ball is constantly entering the opening / closing start winning means and the like and there is no delay in the game (the game ball does not enter the starting winning means too much). (Unless you are forced to play a disadvantageous game due to the above), you can reach a feeling that you do not care much about the mode of the blade member and the pseudo-blade opening mode. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball into the always-start dynamic winning means is reduced, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by that is further enhanced. It will be played.

In the state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, the pseudo blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned regardless of whether the blade member is in the closed position or not. It is desirable that the configuration is such that the change in the visual mode of the place where the image is to be seen is small. For example, when a cover is provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized and a design imitating (the shape of the front surface of) the blade member is applied. In this case, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the pseudo-blade opening mode is only derived, or whether the blade member is actually in the open position (whether the blade member is in the closed position), and the pseudo-blade becomes more difficult to determine. The action and effect of providing the means will be further exerted. Further, the open / close type start winning means of the means B-1 is composed of a second start winning device 33b and a pseudo blade member 431, corresponding to the above-mentioned main embodiment.

In addition, "the opening / closing type start winning means receives a game ball moving in the game area and moves the ball receiving portion that guides the game ball to the outside of the game area and the game area on the side of the ball receiving part. Between the open position that guides the game ball to the ball receiving portion and the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball that moves in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion side. It is provided with a displaceable blade member. "

Means B-2-a. A front covering means is provided in the game area at a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and at least covers the front of the openable start winning means.
The pre-covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and a part of the blade member in the open position in front of the blade member.
The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein at least a part of the pre-covering means has transparency, and the blade member is visible through the pre-covering means.

According to the means B-2-a, the visibility of the blade member and the visibility of the game ball moving around the openable start winning means are provided by providing the front covering means that covers the front of the openable start winning means. Will be relatively low. Therefore, the difference between the pseudo-blade opening mode and the mode in which the blade member is really in the open position can be reduced, and the pseudo-blade opening mode can be directly grasped by the movement path of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Means B-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display unit in the shape of a first object.
The blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means B-4 described later) includes a second object display unit in the shape of a second object.
The blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means B-4) is set to the open position (the functional position corresponding to the means B-4), so that the second object becomes the first object. It becomes a completed display state that forms the third object together with the object,
By setting the blade member (pseudo-blade member corresponding to the means B-4) to the closed position (standby position corresponding to the means B-4), the entire or large of the second object. The part is hidden behind the first object and is in an unfinished display state.
When the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived by the pseudo-blade opening means, the means B is characterized in that the pseudo-blade opening mode is in the completed display state in which the third object is modeled together with the first object. -The gaming machine described in 2-a.

According to the means B-2-b, the first object display unit is provided for the front covering means, and when the blade member is in the open position, the third object is shaped together with the first object. By providing a second object display unit that displays two objects, the line of sight is focused on the third object that operates with the displacement of the blade member, while the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is reduced, or the starting winning means. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in the appearance of the game ball entering the ball. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means is further achieved.

Further, by the pseudo-blade opening means, it is possible to set the completed display state in which the third object is displayed without setting the blade member in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect using the third object more positively. Furthermore, even when the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived, the blade member may have been displaced to the open position because the completed display state is in the shape of the third object (which is easy for the player to recognize as a shape). The reality of the blade opening mode can be further enhanced.

Means B-2-c-1. In the covered area of the game area whose front is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
Means B-2-a or B-2 characterized in that a pseudo winning mode as if the starting winning detecting means was detected can be derived based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. -The gaming machine described in b.

According to the means B-2-c-1, in the covering area whose front is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo winning detecting means is provided together with the opening / closing type starting winning means. That is, in a configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the open / close start winning means is relatively low due to the provision of the front covering means, the front is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. Derives a pseudo-winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back side of the covering means may have entered the opening / closing start winning means (for example, a pseudo-winning means installed in the covering area as in the opening / closing start winning means). Based on the detection of the winning winning detection means, a reaction similar to the case where the starting winning detecting means is detected is derived, and if it is derived, it is suggested whether the reaction is due to the detection of the starting winning detecting means. And so on). Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the openable start winning means, it is possible to add a pattern of "may have entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". Opportunities and types of staging can be increased to diversify staging. As a result, the value of providing a front covering means to make it difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means (directing whether the game ball has entered the openable start winning means) is dramatically improved. It can be enhanced and the interest can be improved.

Means B-2-c-2. When the start winning detection means is detected, a ball entry detection compatible display means capable of deriving a ball entry detection compatible display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the ball-entry detection-compatible display means displays a pseudo-ball-entry detection-compatible display in a form different from the ball-entry detection-compatible display that imitates the ball-entry detection-compatible display. The gaming machine according to B-2-c-1, which is configured to be derivable.

In a configuration in which a ball entry detection compatible display is displayed when a game ball enters the open / close start winning means, it is difficult to see how the game ball enters the open / close start winning means with the front covering means. Even so, at the time when the ball entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is directly grasped that the game ball has not entered the open / close type start winning means. In this respect, by making it possible to display the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display as in the means B-2-c-2, the game ball still opens and closes the start winning prize even at the timing when the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed. It is possible to postpone knowing the result of whether or not the ball has entered the means, and it is possible to produce either a ball entry detection compatible display or a pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means even more interesting. As a result, the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means) can be dramatically increased, and the interest can be improved.

Means B-2-c-3. When the start winning detection means is detected, the same as the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (pseudo-hold icon) is performed before the ball entry detection compatible display (main hold icon) corresponding to the detection is derived. The gaming machine according to means B-2-c-2, characterized in that a precursor display (temporary hold icon), which is an embodiment, can be derived.

According to the means B-2-c-3, when the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display or the precursor display is displayed, the ball entry detection is performed while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the ball entry detection compatible display. It is possible to clarify the difference between the corresponding display and the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (it is easy to understand that the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is not the ball entry detection compatible display). In other words, if you look closely at the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display, it will be different, but if the mode is similar or indistinguishable, the player will pseudo-enter. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball detection compatible display is assumed to be a ball detection compatible display and the person feels distrust.

Means B-2-c-4. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger for the winning / failing lottery, and a state in which the detection is invalid.
In a state in which the detection by the starting prize detecting means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means is effective.
Any of the means B-2-c-1 to B-2-c-3 characterized in that the detection of the pseudo-winning detection means is invalidated in the state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B-2-c-4, the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed in a state where the ball entry detection compatible display is not supposed to be displayed, so that the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display can be obtained. It is possible to avoid a situation where it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display corresponding to the pseudo-entry detection is unnecessarily derived, which causes a decrease in the interest.

Means B-3. The first starting winning means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
The game is configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter (the game is more than the first start winning means. The second start winning means as the openable start winning means (located on the downstream side of the region) and
The first start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start prize means, and the first start prize detection means.
A second start winning detection means as the starting winning detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting winning means is provided.
The main control means has a configuration in which the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the detection of the first starting winning detection means or the second starting winning detecting means.
The gaming machine according to means B-2, wherein the pre-covering means collectively covers at least the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means.

According to the means B-3, the game ball has the first start winning means and the second start winning means by the pre-covering means that collectively covers the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means (opening / closing type starting winning means). It becomes difficult to understand which of the means the ball entered. Therefore, if the second start winning means is set to be open in a balance that allows the player to proceed with the game without much stress, the player is behind the front covering means. As long as the game ball is allowed to enter the ball, the game ball can enter either the first start winning means or the second start winning means, and the game can be advanced with the feeling that a winning or losing lottery can be received. .. In other words, even if the entry rate of the game ball to the first start winning means is low, if the game ball enters the second start winning means relatively easily, the winning / failing lottery can be constantly received. , There is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first start winning means or the second start winning means. Therefore, the first start is gradually performed. I don't care whether or not the game ball is easy to enter as a winning means. As a result, even when the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression caused by that.

In addition, by providing the pre-covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portion of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. That is, if the game ball is launched aiming at the front covering means, it is possible to obtain a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered into either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. Further, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the pre-covering means that collectively covers the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, and the design can be improved.

In addition, as the pre-covering means, the portion covering the first starting winning means and the portion covering the second starting winning means may be integrally formed (integrally molded or combined with each other). , Those composed of separate bodies may be arranged adjacent to each other. Further, "the portion of the front covering means through which the game ball can pass at least behind the gaming area (for example, the front of the winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means" is covered. In the part other than the part), it may be configured to have transparency (consisting of a transparent or translucent material, forming a slit, etc.). " In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes anxious because he / she cannot see what is happening behind the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place for teaching the player predetermined information. For example, the front covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning / failing lottery, etc.) or display an image character or the like.

Means B-4-a. The pseudo-blade opening means is arranged in front of the blade member, and can cover the functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position and the front of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position and
A means characterized in that when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo-blade member is in the functional position, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo-blade member. The gaming machine according to any one of B-1 to B-3.

According to the means B-4-a, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived more realistically. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo-blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member behind the blade member, but in this case, the pseudo-blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward, so that the pseudo-blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward. Even if the blade opening means is set to the pseudo blade opening mode, there is a concern that it will be difficult to see. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo-blade opening means in the pseudo-blade opening mode. As a result, it may be instantly grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, by providing the pseudo-blade member in front of the blade member, the above-mentioned concern can be dispelled.

Further, since the pseudo-blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is in the closed position, the opening / closing type start winning means (second start winning means) is invited to enter more game balls than necessary. A mode in which the pseudo-blade member operates (for example, a mode in which the character operates when the pseudo-blade member is a part of the character display, a mode in which the opening / closing start winning means opens / closes (subtly), etc.), etc. It can also be fully utilized.

The shape of the pseudo-blade member is not limited to a plate shape, for example, a square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo-blade member and can accommodate the blade member inside, or the square frame shape. It may be configured in a substantially U-shaped cross section such that a part is cut out. Further, with respect to the means B-2 and the means B-3, the pseudo-blade member at the functional position may protrude outward from the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, by making it easy to understand the location of the pseudo-blade member, the effect using the pseudo-blade member is recognized, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. You can have the game progress while suppressing the fact that you are being played.

Means B-4-b. The gaming machine according to means B-4-a, wherein the pseudo-blade opening means also displaces the pseudo-blade member to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. ..

According to the means B-4-b, when the blade member is in the open position, the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the blade member is in the closed position but the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The mode in which the blade member is viewed from the front can be the same (in both cases, the pseudo blade member in the functional position is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be further enhanced. Further, when the configuration is adopted, it is not necessary to make the aspect of the front surface side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member, and processing such as drawing a figure on the front surface of the blade member is particularly performed. You don't have to do it. Therefore, the configuration of the blade member can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member and the design is deteriorated. It is possible to prevent such things as being done.

Means B-4-c. The blade member and the pseudo-blade member are rotatably configured, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo-blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine according to 4-a or B-4-b.

According to the means B-4-c, the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo-blade member can be synchronized relatively easily. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the action and effect such as making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member can be further achieved. It is also possible that the pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be extended on the same straight line relatively easily.

Means B-4-d. The blade member presses the pseudo-blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and the blade-side pressing that displaces the pseudo-blade member from the standby position to the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-c, characterized in that the portion is provided.

According to the means B-4-d, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member is driven accordingly. Therefore, it is avoided that each of them operates separately, and the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be synchronized and moved as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position deviate from each other, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether or not it is just done.

When the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade are used. Of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member, the blade-side driving means may be driven.

Means B-4-e. The pseudo-blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, and the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-d, which comprises a unit.

According to the means B-4-e, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member is driven accordingly. Therefore, it is avoided that each of them operates separately, and the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be synchronized and moved as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the standby position deviate from each other, and the blade member exists in the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether or not it only existed in.

When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade are used. Of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member, the pseudo-side driving means may be driven.

Means B-4-f. Means B-4-a, characterized in that the blade member is colorless and transparent, or is made of a material having a hue of the same system as the color of the member located behind the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine according to any one of B-4-e.

According to the means B-4-f, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means B-4-g. A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means is provided.
The opening / closing control of the opening / closing start winning means is executed by the main control means.
The drive control of the pseudo-blade opening means is executed by the sub-control means (corresponding to the information regarding the opening / closing of the opening / closing type start winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine according to a to B-4-f.

According to the means B-4-g, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control means.

B-4-h. The pseudo-blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position.
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo-blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position.
Prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, the main control means outputs release schedule information to the effect that the blade member is displaced to the open position to the sub control means.
The gaming machine according to means B-4-g, wherein the sub-control means displaces the pseudo-blade member to the standby position when the opening schedule information is received.

According to the means B-4-h, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member in the middle of displacement is covered with the pseudo blade member. It is possible to avoid the situation where the problem cannot be achieved.

Means B-4-i. The pseudo-blade member has a larger front area than the vane member.
When the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the standby position side with respect to the surface on the closed position side of the blade member. Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the functional position side with respect to the surface of the blade member on the open position side. The gaming machine according to means B-4-g or means B-4-h, wherein the player is located on the open position side.

When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly different from each other. In this regard, according to the means B-4-i, it is assumed that the blade member that can operate first is additionally covered with the pseudo blade member on the operating direction side, and the blade member is displaced slightly in advance. However, it will be within the range covered by the pseudo-blade member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent it from becoming easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, or to cause a deterioration in design due to a deviation between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. can.

Means B-4-j. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, and are arranged below the central portion of the game board.
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member arranged in front of the blade member is from the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to means B-4-a to B-4-i, which is configured to be located above.

Generally, when a player plays a game machine, the player's face is in a positional relationship so as to face the central portion of the game board. When the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, the player's line of sight to the blade member and the pseudo-blade member is directed diagonally downward (the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are slanted). It looks like you can look into it from above. Therefore, even if the blade member and the pseudo-blade member are arranged in the front-rear direction, there is a concern that the blade member and the pseudo-blade member can be distinguished from each other in an instant.

On the other hand, according to the means B-4-j, since the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade member in the open position and the blade member in the open position The pseudo-blade members in the functional position can be arranged relative to each other so that they overlap as much as possible when viewed from the front upper side. Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo-blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means B-4-k. The traveling direction of the game ball moving in the game area in the specific covering area in which the front is covered by the pseudo-blade member in the functional position of the game area, or in a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-j, wherein the means for changing the course is provided.

For example, even if the game ball enters the specific covering area and the blade member is in the open position, the game ball reaches the guide point guided by the blade member to the opening / closing type start winning means (ball receiving portion). When the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area as it is without being guided by the blade member, and is discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball incident on the specific covering region and the trajectory after the game ball is discharged from the specific covering region extend in a substantially straight line, the gaming ball previously incident on the covering region is a blade member. Without being guided by, and by extension, without entering the starting winning means, it is immediately grasped as being discharged from the specific covering area.

In this respect, the game ball after entering the specific covering area by providing the course changing means at a position adjacent to or close to the specific covering area or the downstream side thereof like the means B-4-k. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the specific cover area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific cover area to a place that is easily visible to the outside, and the game ball is guided by the blade member to open and close type start. It is possible to create more situations in which the ball may or may not have entered the winning means (second starting winning means).

It should be noted that "the side portion of the pseudo-blade member in the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position side than the closed position side surface of the blade member in the open position. May be. Further, "the game ball guided by the blade member in the open position is configured to be covered in front by the pseudo blade member in the functional position". In this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not the game ball is guided by the blade member.

In addition, corresponding to the means B-2, it may be said that "the course changing means is also provided in the covering area covered by the pre-covering means". In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp the behavior of the game ball in the covered area, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball entering the covered area and the game ball discharged from the covered area. Further, in response to the means B-2-d, "the course changing means is provided with a pseudo winning guiding means for guiding a game ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo winning detecting means". May be good. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it must be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. It is possible to avoid the situation where it hardly works. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area until it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means becomes longer, and the game ball which has entered the covered area and the game ball. The action and effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering area are more remarkable.

Means B-5-a. The pseudo-blade opening means is
A pseudo-open object that is provided at a position that overlaps the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction and imitates the blade member in the open position.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 or B-4, characterized in that the pseudo-open object is provided with a pseudo light source for irradiating light.

According to the means B-5, a pseudo blade opening mode can be derived while adopting a relatively simple configuration. It should be noted that the pseudo-blade member as described in the means B-4 may be used in combination. Further, corresponding to the means B-2 and the means B-3, "at least a part of the pre-covering means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident on the light guide plate from the end by the pseudo light source. By doing so, the pseudo-open object may be configured to emerge at a position of the light guide plate that covers the front of the blade member at the open position. " In this case, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the pre-covering means, and the visibility of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be improved. Further, in the pre-covering means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the pseudo light source emits light.

Means B-5-b. The blade member (“pseudo-blade member” when the configuration of the means B-4 is used together) includes a light emitting means that can be visually recognized from the front.
The gaming machine according to means B-5a, wherein the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means is formed at least by imitating the light emitting means.

According to the means B-5-b, the blade member (pseudo-blade member) has a visual mode in which it emits light even if it is attached, so that the blade member is in the open position, and the pseudo-open object and the pseudo-open object. It can be more strongly linked to the pseudo-blade opening mode by the pseudo-blade opening means using a light source (it can be confused by an intuitive judgment at a glance). Further, it is possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it is sufficient to imitate only the light emitting means instead of the whole).

Means B-5-c. The pseudo-open object is not only at a position that overlaps the blade member at the open position in the front-rear direction, but also at a position that overlaps the blade member at the closed position in the front-rear direction, and at a position that overlaps the blade member at the open position in the front-rear direction. It is also provided at the position between the overlapping position and
The gaming machine according to means B-5a or B-5b, wherein the pseudo light source is configured to be capable of sequentially irradiating each pseudo open object with light.

According to the means B-5-c, it is possible to derive an embodiment in which the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, more realistic and various pseudo-blade opening modes can be derived.

Means B-6. An opening covering means that covers the front of the blade member in the open position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, characterized in that at least one of the closing covering means covering the front of the blade member in the closed position is provided.

According to the means B-6, since the blade member in the closed position or the open position is hidden, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the blade member is in the open position or the closed position. In particular, with respect to the means B-4, when the position of the blade member and the position of the pseudo-blade member do not correspond to each other, the action and effect of the means are further exerted. It should be noted that, as in the above means B-4-k, the progress of the game ball moving in the game area in the area of the game area whose front is covered by the disclosed covering means or the part adjacent to the downstream side of the area. It may be provided with a course changing means for changing the direction. That is, for example, even in a configuration such as the means B-4-k in which the pseudo-blade member is not provided, the course is changed in the means B-6, which makes it difficult to determine whether or not the blade member is in the open position. By providing the means, basically the same action and effect as those of the above means B-4-k can be obtained.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting winning means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a winning / failing lottery is performed using a variable display means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, as a starting winning means, an openable opening type starting winning means that allows the game ball to be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won is provided, and the game ball is entered in the starting winning means. It is known to add inflection to playability by setting a state in which it is easy to enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. However, even with the opening / closing start winning means, the opening / closing only is performed according to the result of the open lottery, and the behavior of the opening / closing type is monotonous. Further, the game ball that has reached the open / close start winning means can be entered if the open / close start winning means is in the open state, and cannot be entered if the open / close start winning means is in the closed state. The behavior of the game ball moving around the peripheral part of the means is also relatively monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance of a starting prize and further improving the interest. ..

Means C-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
Starting winning means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
The start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the start prize means, and the start prize detection means.
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, the starting winning means (entrance) or the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the starting winning means (the entrance) provided so as to separate the game ball from the game board so as to pass through the game board (the entrance). It is configured to be displaceable between the functional position that covers the front of the gaming ball (guided by) and the starting winning means or the standby position that exposes the guiding means to the front, and provides transparency at least in part. A gaming machine characterized by having a movable covering means having.

According to the means C-1, when the movable covering means is in the functional position, whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means, or the game, even though the movable covering means has fluoroscopy. The visibility of whether or not the ball is guided by the guiding means is relatively reduced. In particular, when the movable covering means is in operation or immediately after the operation, the player's line of sight is swayed toward the movable covering means, and this tendency becomes stronger. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the player loses sight of the game ball for a moment even if he / she is chasing the game ball with his / her eyes, or it becomes easier for the player to try to grasp the movement of the game ball by another method. You can get the opportunity to add (such as where the game ball moves and the effect of teaching / suggesting what happens as a result is performed by another display means). As a result, it is possible to generate more dramatic developments and effects regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means (starting winning), and it is possible to improve the interest.

The movable covering means of the present means C-1 is composed of, for example, the pseudo-blade member 431 in the above-mentioned main embodiment, and the general portion is composed of the front decorative portion 403.

Means C-2. The traveling direction of the gaming ball moving in the game area in the specific covering area whose front is covered by the movable covering means at the functional position of the game area, or in a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area. The gaming machine according to means C-1, characterized in that a course changing means for changing the above is provided.

For example, even if the game ball enters the specific covering area covered in front by the movable covering means at the functional position, the ball may enter the starting winning means provided in the specific covering area or be guided by the guiding means. If not, the game ball naturally flows down the game area as it is and is discharged to the outside of the specific cover area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game ball incident on the specific covering area and the trajectory after the game ball is discharged from the specific covering area extend in a substantially straight line, the game ball incident on the covering area earlier wins the starting prize. It is immediately grasped (specified) as being discharged from the specific covering area without entering the means.

In this respect, the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the specific covering area by providing the course changing means at a position adjacent to or close to the specific covering area or the downstream side thereof like the means C-2. It becomes difficult to follow. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the specific cover area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific cover area to a place that is easily visible to the outside, and the game ball enters the starting winning means. It is possible to create more situations where the guide may or may not have been guided. As a result, by providing the movable covering means, even if it is difficult to understand whether or not the game ball has started and won a prize, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is directly grasped whether or not the game ball has started and won a prize. It is possible to make such an effect more effective in the case of performing an effect of teaching / suggesting what happened to the game ball that has entered the specific covering area.

Means C-3-a. A front covering means is provided in the game area at a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and at least covers the front of the start winning means.
The pre-covering means is provided adjacent to or close to the movable covering means (in front view) (provided so that it cannot be displaced relative to the game board), and at least a part thereof is transparent. Equipped with a general part to have
The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the course changing means is provided for a general covering area whose front is covered by the general portion of the gaming area.

According to the means C-3-a, it becomes more difficult to grasp the behavior of the game ball in the covering region (general covering region and the specific covering region) behind the front covering means, and the gaming ball that has entered the covering region and the covering region It is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence with the ejected game ball. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game ball that has entered the covered area may or may not have entered the starting winning means. In addition, it may be said that "the pre-covering means is attached to the game board".

Means C-3-b. The gaming machine according to means C-3-a, wherein the pre-covering means is configured to cover at least a part of the front of the movable covering means.

According to the means C-3-b, it is possible to derive a wider variety of effects by combining the pre-covering means and the movable covering means in a more complicated manner. Further, hiding the part of the link mechanism of the movable covering means, hiding the movable covering means in a predetermined state (position), supporting the movable covering means, or guiding the displacement of the movable covering means. Can be done.

Means C-4-a. In the covered area (general covered area) whose front is covered by the pre-covered means in the game area, a pseudo-winning detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the pseudo-winning mode is configured so as to be able to derive a pseudo-winning mode as if the start-up winning detection means was detected based on the detection of the pseudo-winning detecting means.

According to the means C-4-a, in the covering area whose front is covered by the pre-covering means, a pseudo winning detecting means is provided together with the starting winning means. That is, in a configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively low due to the provision of the front covering means, the front covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. Derivation of a pseudo-winning mode such that a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back surface side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, for detecting a pseudo-winning detecting means installed in the covering area as in the starting winning means). Based on this, a reaction similar to the case where the start prize detection means is detected is derived, and if it is derived, it is suggested whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detection means). Can be done. Therefore, as the action of the game ball with respect to the starting winning means, it is possible to add a pattern of "may have entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of staging and diversify the staging. As a result, the value of providing a front covering means to make it difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means (directing whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means) is dramatically increased. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, corresponding to the means C-3, "the course changing means includes a pseudo winning guiding means for guiding a game ball moving in the covering area (general covering area) to the pseudo winning detecting means. It may be "that". In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it must be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. It is possible to avoid the situation where it hardly works. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area until it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means becomes longer, and the game ball which has entered the covered area and the game ball. The action and effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering area are more remarkable.

Means C-4-b. When the start winning detection means is detected, a ball entry detection compatible display means capable of deriving a ball entry detection compatible display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the pseudo-ball-entry detection-compatible display in the ball-entry detection-compatible display means is different from the ball-in-ball detection-compatible display that imitates the ball-in-ball detection-compatible display. The gaming machine according to C-4-a, which is configured so that a pseudo hold icon) can be derived.

According to the means C-4-b, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, the game ball enters the starting winning means by visually recognizing the ball entry detection compatible display means, and the right to receive a winning or losing lottery. Can be grasped (rather easy to grasp). Therefore, even if it becomes a little difficult to see how the game ball enters the starting prize detection means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game has entered with the ball entry detection compatible display means. It can give a sense of security to the person.

In addition, in a configuration in which a ball entry detection compatible display is displayed when a game ball enters the start winning means, the movable covering means makes it difficult to see the state of the game ball entering the starting winning means. However, at the time when the ball entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is directly grasped that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this regard, by making it possible to display the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display, it is possible to know the result of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means even at the timing when the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed. It can be stretched, and it is possible to produce either a ball entry detection compatible display or a pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting prize means even more interesting.

In addition, "when the start winning prize detection means is detected in the state where the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed, the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed instead of the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. It may be configured so that it can be derived. " In this case, it is possible to make the visual mode of the area where the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display are displayed relatively neat. Further, it may be set that "the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is erased after a lapse of a predetermined time after being displayed". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is displayed indefinitely and the role of the pseudo-balloon detection compatible display becomes difficult to understand.

Means C-4-c. When the start winning detection means is detected, the same as the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (pseudo-hold icon) is performed before the ball entry detection compatible display (main hold icon) corresponding to the detection is derived. The gaming machine according to means C-4-b, which is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) which is an embodiment.

According to the means C-4-c, when the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display or the precursor display is displayed, the ball entry detection compatible display is ensured while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the ball entry detection compatible display. It is possible to clarify the difference in mode between the display and the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (to make it easier to understand that the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is not a ball entry detection compatible display). In other words, if you look closely at the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display, it will be different, but if the mode is similar or indistinguishable, the player will pseudo-enter. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball detection compatible display is assumed to be a ball detection compatible display and the person feels distrust.

Means C-4-d. A detection history storage means capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection means is provided, and the detection history storage means can be stored. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-4-a to C-4-c, which is configured to be capable of outputting information.

According to the means C-4-d, by recognizing the pseudo-winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player detects the pseudo-winning). In the unlikely event that a problem occurs due to the corresponding display being mistaken for the ball entry detection compatible display, data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, it can be displayed by a variable display means, etc., or a hall computer. It is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble is aggravated.

Means C-4-e. A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-4-a to C-4-d, wherein the pseudo-winning detecting means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

According to the means C-4-e, by reducing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of configurations for inputting information to the main control means as much as possible, the control load of the main control means can be reduced and the main control means can be reduced. It is possible to suppress fraudulent use of control means.

Means C-4-f. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger for the winning / failing lottery, and a state in which the detection is invalid.
The pseudo winning means in a state in which the detection by the starting prize detecting means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means corresponding to the movable covering means (the front is covered with the front covering means) is valid. Detection of detection means is enabled,
The means according to any one of means C-4-a to C-4-e, wherein the detection by the pseudo-winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. Gaming machine.

According to the means C-4-f, it is clear that the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is displayed by displaying the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display in a state where the ball entry detection compatible display should not be displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where it is recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display corresponding to the pseudo-entry detection is unnecessarily derived, which causes a decrease in the interest.

Means C-5. The winning sound effect corresponding to the detection of the starting winning detection means and
A sound effect generating means capable of generating a confusion winning sound effect close to the winning sound effect is provided.
The sound effect generating means is
Based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting means, the winning sound effect or the confused winning sound effect is generated.
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-4, characterized in that the confused winning sound effect is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means.

According to the means C-5, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means by the sound effect, and the game can proceed more smoothly. can. In addition, a confused winning sound effect is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means, and a confused winning sound effect is also generated based on the detection of the starting winning detecting means, so that the game ball enters the starting winning means. It is possible to make the production such as "may" more realistic.

Means C-6-a. The guide means is an open / close type start winning prize configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. An open position that is provided corresponding to the opening / closing start winning means, which is a means, and guides a game ball that moves to the side of the opening / closing start winning means to the opening / closing start winning means, and the opening / closing start winning means. By displacing the game ball moving sideways between the closed position that restricts the movement of the opening / closing start winning means to the side, the opening / closing start winning means is placed in the open state and the closed state. It is configured as a blade member to change,
The movable covering means is any of the means C-1 to C-5 characterized in that the movable covering means is configured to cover the front of the blade member in the open position by being set to the functional position. The described gaming machine.

According to the means C-6-a, it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether or not the blade member of the open / close type start winning means is in the open position by the movable covering means. It should be noted that "the side portion of the movable covering means at the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position side than the closed position side surface of the blade member at the open position. May be. Further, "the game ball guided by the blade member in the open position is configured to be covered in front by the movable covering means in the functional position". In this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not the game ball is guided by the blade member.

In addition, corresponding to the means C-3, "the pre-covering means (general part) includes a first object display unit in the shape of a first object, and the movable covering means in the shape of a second object. By providing the second object display unit and setting the movable covering means to the functional position, the second object is in a completed display state in which the second object is combined with the first object to form a third object, and the movable covering means is placed. By setting the standby position, the whole or most of the second object may be in an unfinished display state hidden behind the first object. "

In this case, a first object display unit is provided for the pre-covering means (general unit), and a second object in which the third object is shaped together with the first object when it becomes a functional position for the movable covering means. By providing the second object display unit that displays It is possible to reduce the player's interest in the appearance of the game ball entering the ball. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into any of the starting winning means is further achieved.

D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting winning means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a winning / failing lottery is performed using a variable display means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

Further, in recent years, an effect suggesting the content of the variable display (so-called look-ahead effect, hold effect) may be performed before the variable display is executed. However, such suggestive staging has also become a rut, and the effect of improving the interest is decreasing.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest in starting a prize.

Means D-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
Starting winning means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
The start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the start prize means, and the start prize detection means.
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. It is a gaming machine equipped with
A front covering means is provided in the game area at a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and at least covers the front of the start winning means.
In the covered area of the game area whose front is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the starting winning detecting means was detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means.

According to the means D-1, a pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting winning means in the covering area whose front is covered by the pre-covering means. That is, in a configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively low due to the provision of the front covering means, the front covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. Derives a pseudo-winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back surface side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, for detecting a pseudo-winning detecting means installed in the covering area as in the starting winning means). Based on this, a reaction similar to the case where the start prize detection means is detected is derived, and if it is derived, it is suggested whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detection means). Can be done. Therefore, as the action of the game ball for the starting winning means, it is possible to add a pattern of "may have entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of staging and diversify the staging. As a result, the value of providing a front covering means to make it difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means (directing whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means) is dramatically increased. It is possible to improve the interest.

The starting winning means may be one or a plurality. In addition, it may be stated that "the pre-covering means is attached to the game board". In addition, examples of the pseudo-winning mode include a display mode in a predetermined display means, a voice mode by a voice output means, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting means, a combination thereof, and the like.

Means D-2. When the start winning detection means is detected, a ball entry detection compatible display means capable of deriving a ball entry detection compatible display corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the ball-entry detection-compatible display means displays a pseudo-ball-entry detection-compatible display in a form different from the ball-entry detection-compatible display that imitates the ball-entry detection-compatible display. The gaming machine according to D-1, which is configured to be derivable.

In the configuration in which the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed when the game ball enters the starting winning means, even if the front covering means makes it difficult to see the state of the gaming ball entering the starting winning means, etc. At the time when the ball entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is directly grasped that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this regard, by making it possible to display the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display as in the means D-2, is the game ball still in the start winning means even at the timing when the ball entry detection compatible display is displayed? It is possible to postpone knowing the result of whether or not, and it is possible to produce either a ball entry detection compatible display or a pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting prize means even more interesting. As a result, the value of the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting prize means can be dramatically increased, and the interest can be improved.

Means D-3. When the start winning detection means is detected, a precursor display having the same aspect as the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display can be derived before deriving the ball entry detection compatible display corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to means D-2, characterized in that the machine is used.

According to the means D-3, when the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display or the precursor display is displayed, the ball entry detection compatible display and the ball entry detection compatible display are displayed while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the ball entry detection compatible display. It is possible to clarify the difference in mode from the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display (make it easier to understand that the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is not the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display). In other words, if you look closely at the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display, it will be different, but if the mode is similar or indistinguishable, the player will pseudo-enter. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball detection compatible display is assumed to be a ball detection compatible display and the person feels distrust.

Means D-4. Variable display means that can display identification information in a variable manner,
The variable display means includes display control means for varyingly displaying the identification information and stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning / failing lottery after a predetermined time.
When the start winning detection means is detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information used for the winning / losing lottery and the information acquisition means.
A holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number is provided.
When the start winning detection means is detected during the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is the variable display of the active identification information. It ’s a composition that will be done later.
The mode of the ball entry detection compatible display of the ball entry detection compatible display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine according to 3.

According to the means D-4, it is possible to perform a wider variety of effects by using the ball entry detection compatible display and the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. For example, if a predetermined type of pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is derived based on the detection of the start winning prize detection means, and this is changed to the ball entry detection compatible display, expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state. It is possible to perform suggestive effects such as increasing the degree. In addition, "in a state where the number of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means has reached the upper limit, even if the pseudo-winning detection means is detected, the pseudo-entry ball. Do not derive the detection-compatible display. "

Means D-5. When the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display is displayed, an additional display having a mode different from the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-4.

According to the means D-5, by setting the mode of the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display to a mode in which at least a part thereof has not been clarified, the mode of the pseudo-balloon detection compatible display has not been determined, and by extension, the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display has not been determined. It is possible to give a strong impression that there is a possibility of further changes in the ball entry detection compatible display. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display with the ball entry detection compatible display, and misunderstands the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display as the ball entry detection compatible display. (For example, a pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is only performed, but by misunderstanding this as a ball entry detection compatible display, a process that can be executed when the ball entry detection compatible display is performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the fact that is not executed. It should be noted that "the additional display is also derived from the precursor display" and "when the ball entry detection compatible display is derived instead of the precursor display, the pseudo ball entry detection compatible display is supported. The additional display that has been displayed may be erased. "

Means D-6. A detection history storage means capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection means is provided, and the storage information of the detection history storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-5, which is configured to be capable of output.

According to the means D-6, by recognizing the pseudo-winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player displays the pseudo-ball entry detection correspondence display). In the unlikely event that a problem occurs due to (misunderstanding that the display is compatible with ball entry detection), data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, it can be displayed by a variable display means or sent to a hall computer). It is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble is aggravated.

Means D-7. A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means D-1 to D-6, wherein the pseudo-winning detecting means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

According to the means D-7, the control load of the main control means can be reduced and the main control means can be reduced by reducing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of configurations for inputting the information to the main control means as much as possible. It is possible to suppress fraudulent information.

Means D-8. A course changing means for changing the traveling direction of the game ball is provided at a position of the gaming area, which is covered in front by the front covering means, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covering area. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7.

For example, even if the game ball enters the covered area, if the ball cannot enter the starting winning means, it flows down the game area as it is and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game ball is discharged from the covered area extend in a substantially straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area earlier wins the first start. It is immediately recognized as being discharged from the covering area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

In this respect, since the course changing means is provided in the covering region as in the means D-8, the traveling direction of the game ball changes in the covering region and the traveling speed of the game ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible place, and the game ball may have entered the starting prize means. , You can create more situations such as you may not have entered the ball.

Means D-9. The gaming machine according to means D-8, wherein the course changing means includes a pseudo winning guiding means for guiding a gaming ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo winning detecting means.

According to the means D-9, it is possible to easily reach the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. It is possible to avoid the situation where it has to be installed and hardly functions. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area until it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means becomes longer, and the game ball which has entered the covered area and the game ball. The action and effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering area are more remarkable.

Means D-10. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger for the winning / failing lottery, and a state in which the detection is invalid.
In a state in which the detection by the starting prize detecting means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means is effective.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-9, wherein the detection by the pseudo-winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid.

According to the means D-10, it is clearly recognized that the display corresponds to the pseudo-ball entry detection by displaying the pseudo-ball entry detection compatible display in the state where the ball entry detection compatible display should not be displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where it ends up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display corresponding to the pseudo-entry detection is unnecessarily derived, which causes a decrease in the interest.

Means E-1. In the gaming machine according to any one of the above means A to D,
Payout means (payout device 358) for paying out game balls,
A ball tray (upper plate 19 and lower plate 15) that can store the game ball in a position where the player can contact it,
A payout passage for communicating between the payout means and the ball tray is provided.
The payout passage is
The first passage that meanders in the left-right direction (or front-back direction is also possible) and
A second passage provided so as to connect the first position of the first passage and the second position on the downstream side of the first position of the first passage.
Between the first guide state provided at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage and guiding the game ball to the first passage and the second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second passage. Equipped with a payout time adjusting means equipped with a switching means that can be switched with
More than the first time required when the game ball paid out by the payout means is paid out to the ball tray via the first passage.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second time required when the gaming ball paid out by the payout means is paid out to the ball tray via the second passage is set shorter.

According to the means E-1, it is possible to change the timing at which the game ball is paid out from the payout means to the ball tray. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball is paid out to the ball tray (prize ball), whether or not the game ball that has entered the covering area on the back surface side of the front covering means has entered the starting winning means (for example, a pseudo-filling ball). It is possible to suppress a situation in which the detection-compatible display is grasped (before it is taught whether or not the ball entry detection-compatible display is used). In addition, it is possible to perform an effect by adjusting the payout timing of the game ball. For example, the payout passage can be switched to the second passage side based on a predetermined operation of the player, and the game ball can be paid out to the ball tray at an earlier timing than usual. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance and the playability, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The time required for the game ball paid out by the payout means to be paid out to the ball tray via the payout passage varies depending on the distance, angle, shape (course), etc. of the payout passage.

Means E-2. Equipped with operating means (effect button 125, cross button 126, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the switching means is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state based on the operation of the operation means.

Means E-3. Variable display means that can display identification information in a variable manner,
The variable display means includes display control means for varyingly displaying the identification information and stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning / failing lottery after a predetermined time.
When the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means are detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the information used for the winning / failing lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number is provided.
When the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means are detected during the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is displayed. , It is a configuration performed after the variable display of the identification information during execution.
Described in means E-1 or E-2, wherein the switching means is maintained in the first guidance state when the information acquired by the information acquisition means is not stored in the hold storage means. Game machine.

According to the means E-3, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops the game and leaves the seat before the game ball is paid out to the ball tray.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing An example is a ball-and-ball game machine provided with a game area in which a pachinko ball is guided and each ball-entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating opening, etc.) arranged in the gaming area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine provided with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing are performed. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device (a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) and configured so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... First starting winning device, 33b ... Second starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L ... First special display device, 43R ... First 2 Special display device, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device.

Claims (1)

A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
An entry means that allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter,
In a gaming machine provided with a changing means capable of changing a state between an allowable state for allowing entry into the ball entry means and a regulated state for restricting entry into the ball entry means .
A pre-cover provided in the game area so as to cover at least a part of the changing means and the front of the range including the ball entering means so as to be separated from the game board by a distance through which the game ball can pass. Means and
A mode changing means including a light emitting means provided in a region where at least a part of the changing means in a predetermined state which is on the allowable state side of the regulated state can overlap with the front view of the gaming machine is provided.
The first state in which the changing means is in the predetermined state and the light emitting means is in the light emitting state,
A second state in which the changing means is in the regulated state and the light emitting means is turned off,
The changing means has a third state in which the light emitting means is in the regulated state and the light emitting means is in the light emitting state.
A front view of the gaming machine with respect to the light emitting means in the game region, which is the region in which the changing means in the predetermined state exists in the third state and is in the light emitting state. The game ball is configured to be movable in the overlapping area in
In the third state, the light emitting means in the light emitting state comes into contact with the gaming ball moving in the overlapping region in the front view of the gaming machine, and after the contact, the gaming ball is contacted by the pre-covering means. A gaming machine characterized in that a means for making it possible to move the area covered in front is provided .

Images